2008 PT Cruiser Owner`s Guide

2008 PT Cruiser Owner`s Guide
First Edition
Printed in U.S.A.
2008 PT Cruiser Sedan/Convertible
81-026-0844
2008
OWNER’ S MANUAL
PT Cruiser
Sedan/Convertible
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name
Chrysler LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the
name Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution therefor.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking
driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
WARNING!
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
Chrysler LLC reserves the right to make changes in
design and specifications, and/or make additions to or
improvements to its products without imposing any
obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your
perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower,
and your judgment is impaired when you have been
drinking. Never drink and then drive.
Copyright © 2007 Chrysler LLC
SECTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
3
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
4
5
STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
5
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357
6
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
7
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
8
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459
9
10
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
10
INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS
䡵 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
䡵 Vehicle Identification Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
䡵 How To Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
䡵 Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
䡵 Warnings And Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
1
4 INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet
and various customer-oriented documents. You are
urged to read these publications carefully. Following the
instructions and recommendations in this manual will
help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
NOTE: After you read the manual, it should be stored
in the vehicle for convenient reference and remain with
the vehicle when sold, so that the new owner will be
aware of all safety warnings.
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has the factory-trained
technicians and genuine Mopar威 parts, and is interested
in your satisfaction.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the table of contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
The detailed index, at the rear of this manual, contains a
complete listing of all subjects.
Consult the following table for a description of the
symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
this owner’s manual:
INTRODUCTION 5
1
6 INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This manual contains WARNINGS against operating
procedures that could result in an accident or bodily
injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures
that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you do not
read this entire manual you may miss important information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on the
driver’s front corner of the instrument panel, visible
through the windshield. This number also appears on the
vehicle registration or title.
Vehicle Identification Number
INTRODUCTION 7
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or
death.
1
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2
CONTENTS
䡵 A Word About Your Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
▫ Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
▫ Locking Doors With A Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
䡵 Sentry Key威 — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
▫ Sentry Key威 Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
䡵 Steering Wheel Lock — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . .18
▫ If You Wish To Manually Lock The Steering
Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
▫ To Release The Steering Wheel Lock . . . . . . . . .18
▫ Automatic Transaxle Ignition Interlock System . .19
䡵 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
▫ Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
▫ Power Door Locks — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . .20
▫ Child Protection Door Lock System —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
䡵 Remote Keyless Entry (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate . . . . . . . . . .24
▫ To Turn Off “Flash Lights With Lock” . . . . . . . .33
▫ To Lock The Doors And Liftgate — If Equipped
With Power Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
▫ To Program Additional Transmitters . . . . . . . . .33
▫ Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
▫ To Turn Off “Flash Lights With Lock” . . . . . . . .26
▫ To Program Additional Transmitters . . . . . . . . .27
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
▫ Transmitter Battery Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
䡵 Remote Keyless Entry (Convertible) . . . . . . . . . . .30
▫ To Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
▫ Transmitter Battery Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
䡵 Security Alarm System — If Equipped . . . . . . . . .36
▫ To Set The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
▫ Security System Manual Override . . . . . . . . . . .37
䡵 Liftgate (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
▫ To Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
▫ Opening The Liftgate While The Security Alarm
Is Activated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
▫ To Unlatch The Deck Lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
䡵 Deck Lid (Convertible) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
▫ Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
▫ Power Deck Lid Release (Convertible) . . . . . . . .39
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
䡵 Emergency Seat Back Release (Sedan) . . . . . . . . .40
䡵 Emergency Deck Lid Release Latch
(Convertible) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
䡵 Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
▫ Auto Down Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
▫ Rear Window Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
䡵 Occupant Restraints (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
▫ Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt Untwisting Procedure . .52
▫ Adjustable Upper Shoulder Seat Belt
Anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
▫ Enhanced Seat Belt Reminder System
(BeltAlert威) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . .54
▫ Driver And Front Passenger Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS) - Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . .55
▫ Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
䡵 Occupant Restraints (Convertible) . . . . . . . . . . . .81
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
▫ Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt Untwisting Procedure . .88
▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
▫ Enhanced Seat Belt Reminder System
(BeltAlert威) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . .89
2
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Driver And Front Passenger Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
▫ Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
䡵 Engine Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . 115
䡵 Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
The dealer that sold you your new vehicle has the key
code numbers for your vehicle locks. These numbers can
be used to order duplicate keys from your dealer. Ask
your dealer for these numbers and keep them in a safe
place.
IGNITION KEY REMOVAL
Automatic Transaxle
Place the shift lever in PARK and make sure that the shift
knob push button has returned to the out position. Turn the
ignition switch to the ACC position, push the key and
cylinder inward, rotate the key to the LOCK position, and
remove the key.
Vehicle Key
Ignition Key Positions
2
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If you try to remove the key before you place the
lever in PARK, the key may become trapped temporarily
in the ignition cylinder. If this occurs, rotate the key to the
right slightly, then remove the key as described. If a
malfunction occurs, the system will trap the key in the
ignition cylinder to warn you that this safety feature is
inoperable. The engine can be started and stopped but
the key cannot be removed until you obtain service.
WARNING!
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the keys in the
ignition. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
remove key from the ignition and lock all doors
when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Manual Transaxle—If Equipped
Turn the ignition switch to the ACC position, push the
key and cylinder inward, rotate the key to the LOCK
position, and remove the key.
LOCKING DOORS WITH A KEY
You can insert the key with either side up. To lock the
door, turn the key rearward, to unlock the door, turn the
key forward. See Section 7 of this manual for door lock
lubrication.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
KEY-IN-IGNITION REMINDER
Opening the driver’s door when the key is in the ignition,
sounds a signal to remind you to remove the key.
NOTE: With the driver’s door open, and the key in the
ignition, both the power door locks and Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) will not function.
SENTRY KEY姞 — IF EQUIPPED
The Sentry Key威 Immobilizer System prevents unauthorized operation of the vehicle by disabling the engine.
The system will shut the engine off after two seconds of
running if an invalid key is used to start the vehicle. This
system utilizes ignition keys, which have an electronic
chip (transponder) embedded into them. Only keys that
have been programmed to the vehicle can be used to start
and operate the vehicle.
The Sentry Key威 Immobilizer System does not need to be
armed or activated. Operation of the system is automatic
regardless of whether or not the vehicle is locked or
unlocked. During normal operation, the Theft Alarm/
Immobilizer Light will come on for three seconds immediately after the ignition switch is turned on for a bulb
check. Afterwards, if the bulb remains on, this indicates a
problem with the electronics.
If the bulb begins to flash after the bulb check, this
indicates that an invalid key has been used to start the
vehicle. Both of these conditions will result in the engine
being shut off after two seconds of running.
Keep in mind that a key, which has not been programmed is also considered an invalid key even if it is
cut to fit the ignition lock cylinder for that vehicle.
If the Theft Alarm/Immobilizer Light comes on during
normal vehicle operation, (the vehicle has been running
for longer than 10 seconds), a fault has been detected in
the electronics and the vehicle should be serviced as soon
as possible.
2
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• The Sentry Key威 Immobilizer System is not compatible with remote starting systems. Use of these systems
may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of
security protection.
• Exxon/Mobil Speed Pass,™ additional Sentry Keys, or
any other transponder equipped components on the
same keychain will not cause a key-related (transponder) fault unless the additional part is physically held
against the ignition key being used when starting the
vehicle. Cell phones, pagers, or other RF electronics
will not cause interference with this system.
All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
Replacement Keys
NOTE: Only keys that have been programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start the vehicle. Once
a Sentry Key威 has been programmed to a vehicle, it
cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
CAUTION!
Always remove Sentry Keys from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
with a four digit Personal Identification Number (PIN).
This PIN is required for replacement of keys by an
authorized dealer. Duplication of keys must be performed at an authorized dealer. This procedure consists
of programming a blank key to the vehicle electronics. A
blank key is one which has never been programmed.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key威 Immobilizer
System serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to the
dealer.
Sentry Key姞 Programming
If you have two valid sentry keys, you can program new
sentry keys to the system by performing the following
procedure:
1. Cut the additional Sentry Key威 Transponder blank(s)
to match the ignition switch lock cylinder key code.
2. Insert the first valid key into the ignition switch. Turn
the ignition switch to the “ON” position for at least three
seconds, but no longer than 15-seconds. Then, turn the
ignition switch to the “LOCK” position and remove the
first key.
3. Insert the second valid key into the ignition switch.
Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” position within 15
seconds. After ten seconds, a chime will sound. In
addition, the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light will
begin to flash. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”
position and remove the second key.
4. Insert a blank Sentry Key威 into the ignition switch.
Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” position within 60
seconds. After 10 seconds, a single chime will sound. In
addition, the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light will
stop flashing. To indicate that programming is complete,
the indicator light will turn on again for three seconds
and then turn off.
The new Sentry Key威 has been programmed. The Keyless Entry Transmitter will also be programmed during
this procedure. Repeat this procedure to program up to a
total of 8 keys. If you do not have a programmed Sentry
Key威, contact your dealer for details.
2
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If a programmed key is lost, see your dealer to
have all remaining keys erased from the systems
memory. This will prevent the lost key from starting your
vehicle. The remaining keys must then be reprogrammed. All vehicle keys must be taken to the dealer at
the time of service to be reprogrammed.
STEERING WHEEL LOCK — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a passive steering
wheel lock. This lock prevents steering the vehicle without the ignition key. If the steering wheel is moved no
more than one—half turn in either direction and the key
is not in the ignition switch, the steering wheel will lock.
General Information
The Sentry Key威 system complies with FCC rules part 15
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
subject to the following conditions:
If You Wish To Manually Lock The Steering
Wheel:
With the engine running, turn the steering wheel upside
down, turn off the engine and remove the key. Turn the
steering wheel slightly in either direction until the lock
engages.
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference that may be
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
To Release The Steering Wheel Lock:
Insert the key in the ignition switch and start the engine.
If the key is difficult to turn, move the wheel slightly to
the right or left to disengage the lock.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
NOTE: If you turned the wheel to the right to engage
the lock, you must turn the wheel slightly to the right to
disengage it. If you turned the wheel to the left to engage
the lock, turn the wheel slightly to the left to disengage it.
2
Automatic Transaxle Ignition Interlock System
This system prevents the key from being removed unless
the shift lever is in PARK and the shift knob push-button
is out. It also prevents shifting out of PARK unless the
key is in the ACC, or ON positions, and the brake pedal
is depressed.
DOOR LOCKS
MANUAL DOOR LOCKS
Use the manual door lock plunger to lock the doors from
inside the vehicle. If the plunger is down when the door
is closed, the door will lock. Therefore, make sure the
keys are not inside the vehicle before closing the door.
Door Lock Plunger
WARNING!
For personal security, and safety in the event of an
accident, lock the vehicle doors as you drive as well
as when you park and leave the vehicle.
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
When leaving the vehicle always remove the key
from the ignition lock, and lock your vehicle. Do not
leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of
vehicle equipment may cause severe personal injuries and death.
POWER DOOR LOCKS — IF EQUIPPED
A door lock switch is on each front door panel. Press this
switch to lock or unlock the doors.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation to thieves.
Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all
of the doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Power Door Lock Switch
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS — IF EQUIPPED
The doors will lock automatically on vehicles with power
door locks if all of the following conditions are met:
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC the Automatic
Door Locks can be enabled or disabled by performing the
following procedure:
1. The Auto Lock feature is enabled.
1. Close all doors and place the key in the ignition.
2. The transmission is in gear.
2. Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON and
back to LOCK four times ending up in the LOCK
position.
3. All doors are closed.
4. The throttle is pressed.
5. The vehicle speed is above 15 mph (24 km/h).
6. The doors were not previously locked using the power
door lock switch or remote keyless entry transmitter.
The Automatic Door Lock feature can be enabled or
disabled. Refer to “Personal Settings” (Customer Programmable Features) in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — if equipped section of this manual
for details.
3. Depress the power door lock switch to lock the doors.
4. A single chime will indicate the completion of the
programming.
Auto Unlock
The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with
power door locks if:
1. The Auto Unlock feature is enabled.
2. The transmission was in gear and the vehicle speed
returned to 0 mph (0 km/h).
2
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. The transmission is in NEUTRAL or PARK.
4. The driver door is opened.
5. The doors were not previously unlocked.
6. The vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h).
The Auto Unlock feature can be enabled or disabled.
Refer to “Personal Settings” (Customer Programmable
Features) in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) — if equipped section of this manual.
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC the Auto
Unlock Feature can be enabled or disabled by performing
the following procedure:
1. Close all doors and place the key in the ignition.
2. Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON and
back to LOCK four times ending up in the LOCK
position.
3. Depress the power door unlock switch to unlock the
doors.
4. Verify reprogramming by driving the vehicle.
NOTE: Use the Auto Door Locks and Auto Unlock
features in accordance with local laws.
CHILD PROTECTION DOOR LOCK SYSTEM — IF
EQUIPPED
To provide a safer environment for children riding in the
rear seat, the rear doors have the “child-protection” door
lock system.
To use the system, open each rear door and move the
control UP to engage. When the system on a door is
engaged, that door can only be opened by using the
outside door handle even if the inside door lock is in the
unlocked position.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the child protection locks are
engaged.
NOTE: For emergency exit with the system engaged,
move the lock plunger up (unlocked position), roll down
window and open the door with the outside door handle.
Child Lock Control
2
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (SEDAN)
Three Button Key
This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and
liftgate or activate the panic alarm from distances a
minimum of 66 feet (20 meters) using a hand held radio
transmitter. The transmitter need not be pointed at the
vehicle to activate the system.
NOTE: The line of transmission must not be blocked
with metal objects.
TO UNLOCK THE DOORS AND LIFTGATE:
Press and release the UNLOCK button on the keyfob
once to unlock only the driver’s door or twice to unlock
all the doors and liftgate. When the UNLOCK button is
pressed, the illuminated entry will initiate, and the
parking lights will flash on twice. The time for this
feature is programmable on vehicles equipped with the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to
“Turn Headlamps on with Remote Key Unlock” under
“Personal Settings” in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) section of this manual for details.
NOTE: The system can also be programmed to unlock
all doors on the first press of the UNLOCK button. On
electronic vehicle information center (EVIC) equipped
vehicles refer to “Remote Unlock Driver’s Door 1st”
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
under “Personal Settings” in the EVIC section of this
manual. On non EVIC – equipped vehicles perform the
following steps:
The system can be programmed to unlock all the doors
upon the first UNLOCK button press by using the
following procedure:
1. Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed
keyfob.
2. Continue to hold the LOCK button at least four
seconds, but not longer than 10 seconds, then press and
hold the UNLOCK button. A single chime will sound to
indicate that this feature has changed.
3. Release both buttons at the same time.
4. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle, by
pressing the LOCK/UNLOCK button on the keyfob.
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the keyfob while
you are inside the vehicle will activate the Security
Alarm. Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated
will cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button
to deactivate the Security Alarm.
5. If the desired programming was not achieved or to
reactivate this feature, repeat the above steps.
TO LOCK THE DOORS AND LIFTGATE — IF
EQUIPPED WITH POWER OPTIONS:
Press and release the LOCK button on the transmitter to
lock all doors. The turn signal lights will flash and the
horn will chirp once to acknowledge the lock signal. If
desired, the “Sound Horn On Lock” and “Flash Lamps
With Lock” feature can be turned on or off. On electronic
vehicle information center (EVIC) equipped vehicles refer to “Personal Settings” in the “Electronic Vehicle
2
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Center (EVIC)” section of this manual. On
non EVIC – equipped vehicles perform the following
steps:
1. Press the LOCK button for four to ten seconds.
2. While the LOCK button is pressed (after four seconds),
press the PANIC button. Release both buttons.
The “Sound Horn On Lock” and “Flash Lamps With
Lock” feature can be reactivated by repeating this procedure.
PANIC ALARM
The panic mode flashes the park lights, and sounds the
horn for about three minutes or until the alarm is turned
off.
Using The Panic Alarm:
To turn the panic alarm feature ON or OFF, press and
hold the PANIC button on the transmitter for at least one
second and release. When the panic alarm is on, the
headlights and park lights will flash, the horn will pulse
on and off and the interior lights will turn on.
The panic alarm will stay on for three minutes unless you
turn it off by pressing the PANIC button a second time or
if the vehicle speed is 5 mph (8 km/h) or greater.
NOTE: When you turn off the panic alarm by pressing
the PANIC button a second time, you may have to be
closer to the vehicle due to the radio frequency noises of
the system.
TO TURN OFF “FLASH LIGHTS WITH LOCK”:
NOTE: The Flash Lights With Lock feature can be
turned on or off. On Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) equipped vehicles refer to ⬙Personal Settings⬙ in the EVIC section of this manual. On non EVIC equipped vehicles perform the following steps:
1. Press the UNLOCK button for four to ten seconds.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
2. While the UNLOCK button is pressed, (after four
seconds) press the LOCK button. Release both buttons.
3. Test the flash lamps with LOCK feature while outside
of the vehicle, by pressing the LOCK button on the
keyfob with the ignition in the LOCK position, and the
key removed.
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the keyfob, while
you are in the vehicle, will activate the Security Alarm.
Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated will
cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button to
deactivate the Security Alarm.
The “Flash Lights On Lock/Unlock” feature can be
reactivated by repeating this procedure.
TO PROGRAM ADDITIONAL TRANSMITTERS:
Vehicles will be shipped from the assembly plants with
two keyfob transmitters programmed only for that vehicle. A total of eight fobs can be programmed for your
vehicle. Additional fobs can be programmed to your
vehicle through the use of a currently programmed fob.
NOTE: When entering program mode using that fob, all
other programmed fobs will be erased and you will have
to reprogram them for your vehicle.
Use the Following procedure to program additional key
fobs if the vehicle is not equipped with Sentry Key威:
1. Enter your vehicle and close all doors.
2. Fasten your seat belt (Fastening the seatbelt will cancel
any chiming that may confuse you during this programming procedure).
3. Place the key into the ignition.
2
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Turn the ignition to the ON position Do not start the
engine.
12. Repeat steps eight through ten to program up to six
additional fobs.
5. Press and hold the UNLOCK button on the keyfob.
13. Turn the ignition to the OFF position.
6. After holding the UNLOCK button for four seconds,
also press the PANIC button within six seconds.
14. Your vehicle will remain in program mode up to 60
seconds from when the original chime was heard. After
60 seconds, all programmed fobs function normally.
7. When a single chime is heard release both buttons. The
chime is an indication that you have successfully entered
program mode. All fobs that are to be programmed must
be done so within 60 seconds of when the chime was
heard.
NOTE: If you do not have a programmed transmitter,
contact your dealer for details.
8. Using the fob to be programmed, press and release
both the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons, simultaneously.
GENERAL INFORMATION
This device complies with part 15 of FCC rules and with
RS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
9. A single chime will be heard.
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
10. Within four seconds of hearing the chime, press and
release the UNLOCK button on the fob.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
11. A single chime will be heard.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
If your Remote Lock Control fails to operate from a
normal distance, check for these two conditions.
1. If the keyfob is equipped with a screw, remove the
screw. With the transmitter buttons facing down, use a
flat blade to pry the two halves of the transmitter apart.
Make sure not to damage the elastomer seal during
removal.
1. Weak batteries in transmitter. The expected life of
batteries is five years.
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
tower, airport transmitter, military base, and some mobile
or CB radios.
TRANSMITTER BATTERY SERVICE
NOTE: Perchlorate Material – special handling may apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
The recommended replacement battery is CR2032.
Separating RKE Transmitter Halves
2
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Remove and replace the batteries. Avoid touching the
new batteries with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with
rubbing alcohol.
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (CONVERTIBLE)
3. To assemble the transmitter case, snap the two halves
together.
NOTE: If the keyfob is equipped with a screw, reinstall
and tighten the screw until snug.
Four-Button Transmitter
This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors or
open the deck lid from distances of 23–50 feet (7–15
meters) using a transmitter. You don’t have to point the
transmitter at the vehicle to activate the system. Each
vehicle comes with two transmitters.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
TO UNLOCK THE DOORS:
Press and release the UNLOCK button on the keyfob
once to unlock only the driver’s door or twice to unlock
all the doors and liftgate. When the UNLOCK button is
pressed, the illuminated entry will initiate, and the
parking lights will flash on twice. The time for this
feature is programmable on vehicles equipped with the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to
“Turn Headlamps on with Remote Key Unlock” under
“Personal Settings” in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) section of this manual for details.
NOTE: The system can also be programmed to unlock
all doors on the first press of the UNLOCK button. On
electronic vehicle information center (EVIC) equipped
vehicles refer to “Remote Unlock Driver’s Door 1st”
under “Personal Settings” in the EVIC section of this
manual. On non EVIC – equipped vehicles perform the
following steps:
The system can be programmed to unlock all the doors
upon the first UNLOCK button press by using the
following procedure:
1. Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed
keyfob.
2. Continue to hold the LOCK button at least four
seconds, but not longer than ten seconds, then press and
hold the UNLOCK button. A single chime will sound to
indicate that this feature has changed.
3. Release both buttons at the same time.
4. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle, by
pressing the LOCK/UNLOCK button on the keyfob.
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the keyfob while
you are inside the vehicle will activate the Security
Alarm. Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated
will cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button
to deactivate the Security Alarm.
2
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
5. If the desired programming was not achieved or to
reactivate this feature, repeat the above steps.
TO LOCK THE DOORS:
Press and release the LOCK button on the transmitter to
lock all doors. The turn signal lights will flash and the
horn will chirp once to acknowledge the lock signal. If
desired, the “Sound Horn On Lock” and “Flash Lamps
With Lock” feature can be turned on or off. On electronic
vehicle information center (EVIC) equipped vehicles refer to “Personal Settings” in the “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)” section of this manual. On
non EVIC – equipped vehicles perform the following
steps:
1. Press the LOCK button for four to ten seconds.
2. While the LOCK button is pressed (after four seconds),
press the PANIC button. Release both buttons.
The “Sound Horn On Lock” and “Flash Lamps With
Lock” feature can be reactivated by repeating this procedure.
TO UNLATCH THE DECK LID:
Press the “Rear Release” button twice to unlatch the deck
lid.
PANIC ALARM
The panic mode flashes the park lights, and sounds the
horn for about three minutes or until the alarm is turned
off.
Using The Panic Alarm:
To turn the panic alarm feature ON or OFF, press and
hold the PANIC button on the transmitter for at least one
second and release. When the panic alarm is on, the
headlights and park lights will flash, the horn will pulse
on and off and the interior lights will turn on.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
The panic alarm will stay on for three minutes unless you
turn it off by pressing the PANIC button a second time or
if the vehicle speed is 5 mph (8 km/h) or greater.
NOTE: When you turn off the panic alarm by pressing
the PANIC button a second time, you may have to be
closer to the vehicle due to the radio frequency noises of
the system.
TO TURN OFF “FLASH LIGHTS WITH LOCK”:
NOTE: The Flash Lights With Lock feature can be
turned on or off. On electronic vehicle information center
(EVIC) equipped vehicles refer to ⬙Personal Settings⬙ in
the EVIC section of this manual. On non EVIC - equipped
vehicles perform the following steps:
1. Press the UNLOCK button for four to ten seconds.
2. While the UNLOCK button is pressed, (after four
seconds) press the LOCK button. Release both buttons.
3. Test the flash lamps with LOCK feature while outside
of the vehicle, by pressing the LOCK button on the
keyfob with the ignition in the LOCK position, and the
key removed.
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the keyfob, while
you are in the vehicle, will activate the Security Alarm.
Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated will
cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button to
deactivate the Security Alarm.
The “Flash Lights On Lock/Unlock” feature can be
reactivated by repeating this procedure.
TO PROGRAM ADDITIONAL TRANSMITTERS:
NOTE: If vehicle is equipped with the optional Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) in the instrument cluster, the transmitters may also be programmed
through the EVIC display.
2
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Up to eight transmitters can be programmed to your vehicle.
To obtain additional transmitters, contact your authorized
dealer. To program a transmitter (within 23–50 ft/7–15 m of
the vehicle), perform the following procedure:
1. Gather every transmitter that is to be used with the
vehicle including any transmitters that are currently
programmed.
2. Enter Program Mode: Turn the ignition to the ON
position, and using a currently programmed transmitter;
press and hold the ⬙Unlock⬙ button on the transmitter.
Continue to hold the “Unlock” button, wait at least four
but no longer than 10 seconds, then press and hold the
PANIC button for at least one second. Release both
buttons simultaneously.
3. Program Each Transmitter: All transmitters to be used
with your vehicle must be programmed as follows:
Press and release the ⬙Lock⬙ and ⬙Unlock⬙ buttons simultaneously, followed by a press and release of ANY button on
each transmitter to be programmed. You will hear a chime
when a transmitter has been successfully programmed.
GENERAL INFORMATION
This transmitter complies with FCC rules part 15 and
with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
If your Remote Keyless Entry威 fails to operate from a
normal distance, check for these two conditions:
1. Weak batteries in transmitter. The expected life of
batteries is from one to two years
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB radios.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
TRANSMITTER BATTERY SERVICE
NOTE: Perchlorate Material – special handling may apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.”
2
The recommended replacement battery is the Panasonic威
CR2032 or equivalent.
1. Pry the transmitter halves apart with a dime or similar
object. Make sure not to damage the rubber gasket
material during removal.
Separating Transmitter Halves
2. Remove and replace the batteries. Avoid touching the
new batteries with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
battery deterioration. If you touch the battery, clean it
with rubbing alcohol.
3. Reassemble the transmitter case. Snap the halves
together and test transmitter operation.
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If the keyfob is equipped with a screw, reinstall
and tighten the screw until snug.
SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The system monitors the doors, liftgate, and ignition
switch for unauthorized operation.
If something triggers the alarm, the system will signal for
about 18 minutes. For the first three minutes the horn will
sound and the headlights, park lights, tail lights and the
indicator light in the cluster will flash. Then the exterior
lights will flash for another 15 minutes.
If the monitored system, which triggered the alarm is
deactivated the alarm will continue to sound until three
minutes of alarm time is reached. If the monitored
system, which triggered the alarm is deactivated after the
alarm has been on for three minutes the alarm will shut
off immediately.
To set the alarm:
1. Remove the keys from the ignition switch and get out
of the vehicle.
2. Lock the door using either the power door lock switch,
or the Keyless Entry Transmitter and close all doors.
3. The indicator light in the instrument cluster will flash
rapidly for 16 seconds. This shows that the system is
arming. During this period, if a door is opened, the
ignition switch is turned ON, or the power door locks are
unlocked by either the power door lock switch or the
remote keyless entry transmitter, the system will automatically disarm. After 16 seconds the indicator light will
flash slowly. This shows that the system is fully armed.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
To disarm the system:
Unlock a front door using the Keyless Entry Transmitter.
Starting the vehicle with a valid Sentry key will disarm
the system. A valid key is one that is programmed to that
particular vehicle. A valid key will disarm the system, an
invalid key will trigger the alarm.
2
Tamper Alert
If the horn sounds three times when you unlock a front
door using the Keyless Entry Transmitter, the alarm has
been activated. Check the vehicle for tampering.
Security System Manual Override
The system will not arm if you lock the doors using the
manual door lock plunger.
Door Lock Plunger
LIFTGATE (SEDAN)
The liftgate can be unlocked by pressing twice on the
remote keyless entry button or by activating the power
door lock switches located on the front doors.
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To open the unlocked liftgate, squeeze the liftgate release
touch pad located on the backside of the liftgate handle
and pull the liftgate open with one fluid motion.
Opening The Liftgate While the Security Alarm Is
Activated
Unlocking the liftgate with the remote keyless entry
transmitter will allow access to the liftgate without
sounding or disarming the security alarm system. Once
the liftgate is closed, it will again be monitored by the
security alarm system.
WARNING!
• Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your
passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep
the liftgate closed when you are operating the
vehicle.
Liftgate Handle
• If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed.
DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
Gas props support the liftgate in the open position.
However, because the gas pressure drops with temperature, it may be necessary to assist the props when
opening the liftgate in cold weather.
DECK LID (CONVERTIBLE)
Gas props support the deck lid in the open position.
However, because the gas pressure drops with temperature, it may be necessary to assist the props when
opening the deck lid in cold weather.
POWER DECK LID RELEASE (Convertible)
You can open the deck lid by pressing the Remote
Keyless Entry Button or from inside the vehicle, using the
switch located inside the glove box. On vehicles
equipped with a manual transmission, the power deck
lid release switch is disabled if the doors are locked, or if
vehicle speed exceeds 0 mph (0 km/h), or when the
clutch pedal is depressed. On vehicles equipped with an
automatic transmission, the power deck lid release
switch is disabled if the doors are locked, or the transmission is out of PARK.
WARNING!
• Driving with the deck lid open can allow poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your
passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep
the deck lid closed when you are operating the
vehicle.
• If you are required to drive with the deck lid open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed.
DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
2
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
EMERGENCY SEAT BACK RELEASE (SEDAN)
WARNING!
seat back can be unlatched by pulling down on the
glow-in-the-dark lever attached to the left rear seat back
latching mechanism.
Do not allow children to have access to the liftgate
area with the rear shelf panel in position 1 (Top) or
position 2 (Middle), either by climbing into the
liftgate from outside, or through the inside of the
vehicle. Always close the liftgate when your vehicle
is unattended. Once in the liftgate area, young children may not be able to escape, even if they entered
through the rear seat. If trapped in the liftgate,
children can die from suffocation or heat stroke.
As a security measure, a Seat Back Emergency Release
lever is built into the left side rear seat back latching
mechanism. In the event of an individual being locked
inside the liftgate area with the rear shelf panel in
position 1 (Top) or position 2 (Middle), the left side rear
Emergency Seat Back Release
Once unlatched the seat back can be pushed forward to
gain access into the interior of the vehicle.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
NOTE: Make sure that the elastic loop is around the
emergency release handle at all times. If the handle is
pulled downward, entirely through the elastic loop, the
handle will not return to its original position and the seat
back may not operate properly.
EMERGENCY DECK LID RELEASE LATCH
(CONVERTIBLE)
As a security measure, an emergency deck lid release
lever is built into the deck lid latching mechanism. In the
event of an individual being locked inside the trunk, the
trunk can be simply opened by pulling on the glow-inthe-dark lever attached to the deck lid latching mechanism. See following picture.
WARNING!
Do not allow children to have access to the trunk,
either by climbing into the trunk from outside, or
through the inside of the vehicle. Always close the
deck lid when your vehicle is unattended. Once in
the trunk, young children may not be able to escape,
even if they entered through the rear seat. If trapped
in the trunk, children can die from suffocation or
heat stroke.
Emergency Deck Lid Release Handle
2
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
POWER WINDOWS
The power window switches are located on the instrument panel above the radio. The top left switch controls
the left front window and the top right switch controls
the right front window.
The lower left switch controls the left rear window and
the lower right switch controls the right rear window.
The sedan has a window lock switch, located between the
window switches allows you to disable the rear window
switches that are located at the back of the center floor
console.
The convertible has an ⬙All windows up⬙ and ⬙All
windows down,⬙ switch located between the window
switches instead of the lock switch.
Power Window Switches
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
WARNING!
Never leave children in a vehicle, with the keys in
the ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the windows while operating the power window switches.
Such entrapment may result in serious injury or
death.
AUTO DOWN FEATURE
The driver’s and passenger’s front window switches
have an auto down feature. Press the window switch past
the detent, release, and the window will go down automatically. Press the switch a second time in either direction to stop the window.
To open the window part way, press the window switch
part way and release it when you want the window to
stop.
REAR WINDOW SWITCHES
There are also rear passenger window switches (sedan
only) located at the rear of the center console.
Power Rear Window Switches Sedans
2
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WIND BUFFETING
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS (SEDAN)
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems. These include:
• Front and rear seat belts for all passengers
• Front airbags for both the driver and front passenger
• Pretensioning and load-limiting retractors for the front
seat belts.
• Knee Impact Blocker panels for front seat occupants.
• Supplemental front seat mounted side Head/Thorax
airbags for both the driver and front passenger (if
equipped).
• Front seat belt retractors that incorporate pretensioners to enhance occupant protection by managing occupant energy during an impact event.
If you will be carrying children too small for adult-size
seat belts, your seat belts or the LATCH feature also, can
be used to hold infant and child restraint systems.
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
WARNING!
In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled
up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other
passengers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle.
Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are
buckled up properly.
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
LAP/SHOULDER BELTS
All the seats in your vehicle are equipped with Lap/
Shoulder Belts.
The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during
very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the
shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under
normal conditions. But in a collision, the belt will lock
and reduce the risk of your striking the inside of the
vehicle or being thrown out.
2
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
WARNING!
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
belts are designed to go around the large bones of
your body. These are the strongest parts of your
body and can take the forces of a collision the best.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You might
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to
wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
WARNING!
Two people should never be belted into a single seat
belt. People belted together can crash into one another in an accident, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
seat, next to your arm. Grasp the latch plate and pull out
the belt. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as
necessary to allow the belt to go around your lap.
WARNING!
A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
2
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• A belt that is worn under your arm is very dangerous. Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause internal
injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder bones.
Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a collision.
Latch Plate
3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up
on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight,
tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug belt
reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision.
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
Removing Slack From Belt
2
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
internal injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t be
at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as possible and keep it snug.
• A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride
too high on your body, possibly causing internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the buckle
nearest you.
• A twisted belt can’t do its job as well. In a collision
it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt is straight.
If you can’t straighten a belt in your vehicle, take it to
your dealer and have it fixed.
• A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well.
In a sudden stop you could move too far forward,
increasing the possibility of injury. Wear your seat
belt snugly.
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor
will withdraw any slack in the belt.
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position.
If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to
allow the belt to retract fully.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.).
Rear Center Lap/Shoulder Belt Retractor Lock-Out
This feature is designed to lock the retractor whenever
the rear seat back is not fully latched. This prevents
someone from wearing the rear center lap/shoulder belt
when the rear seat back is not fully latched.
NOTE:
• If the rear center lap/shoulder belt can not be pulled
out, check that the rear seat back is fully latched.
• If the rear seat back is properly latched and the rear
center lap/shoulder belt still can not be pulled out, the
Automatic-Locking Retractor (ALR) system may be
activated. To reset this feature you must let all of the
belt webbing return into the retractor. You will not be
able to pull out more webbing until all of the webbing
has been returned back into the retractor.
2
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
The rear center lap/shoulder belt is equipped with a
lockout feature to ensure that the rear seat back is in
the fully upright and locked position when occupied.
If the rear seat back is not fully upright and locked
and the rear center lap/shoulder belt can be pulled
out of the retractor, the vehicle should immediately
be taken to your dealer for service. Failure to follow
this warning could result in serious or fatal injury.
LAP/SHOULDER SEAT BELT UNTWISTING
PROCEDURE
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
2. At about six to twelve inches (15 to 30 cm) above the
latch plate, grasp and twist the belt webbing 180° to
create a fold that begins immediately above the latch
plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the
latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing.
ADJUSTABLE UPPER SHOULDER SEAT BELT
ANCHORAGE
In the front seat, the shoulder belt can be adjusted
upward or downward to position the belt away from
your neck. Push up or down on the anchorage button to
release the anchorage, and move it up or down to the
position that serves you best.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS
The seat belts for both front seating positions are
equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision.
These devices improve the performance of the seat belt
by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant early
in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occupants,
including those in child restraints.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will
prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average,
you’ll prefer a higher position. When you release the
anchorage, try to move it up or down to make sure that
it is locked in position.
The pretensioners are triggered by the front airbag control module (see Airbag Section). Like the front airbags,
the pretensioners are single use items. After a collision
that is severe enough to deploy the airbags and pretensioners, both must be replaced.
2
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
ENHANCED SEAT BELT REMINDER SYSTEM
(BELTALERT姞)
If the driver’s or front passenger’s seat belt has not been
buckled within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle and if
the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), the
Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert威) will alert the
driver or front passenger to buckle their seat belt. The
driver should also instruct all other occupants to buckle
their seat belts. If the driver unbuckles the seat belt while
the vehicle is in motion an immediate chime will be heard
and, the Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert威) will
continue to chime and flash the Seat Belt Warning Light
for 96 seconds or until the driver’s seat belt is buckled.
The Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert威) will be reactivated if the driver’s or front passenger’s seat belt is
unbuckled for more than 10 seconds and the vehicle
speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h).
NOTE:
• The Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert威) can be
enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer.
• DaimlerChrysler does not recommend deactivating
the Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert威).
If the Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert威) is deactivated, the Seat Belt Warning Light will continue to
illuminate while the driver seat belt remains unfastened.
SEAT BELTS AND PREGNANT WOMEN
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts
throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is
the best way to keep the baby safe.
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the force if there is a collision.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
DRIVER AND FRONT PASSENGER
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) AIRBAG
This vehicle has airbags for both the driver and front
passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint
systems. The driver’s front airbag is mounted in the
center of the steering wheel. The passenger’s front airbag
is mounted in the instrument panel, above the glove
compartment. The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on
the airbag covers.
2
Front Airbag Components
NOTE: The front airbags are certified to the Federal
regulations that allow less forceful deployment.
The front airbags have a multistage inflator design. This
may allow the airbag to have different rates of inflation
that are based on collision severity and occupant size.
Also, the front passenger airbag is certified to the Federal
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
regulations that define Occupant Classification (Refer to
⬙Occupant Classification System⬙ in this section).
If the vehicle is equipped with side airbags, they are
located inside the driver and front passenger seats, and
their covers are also labeled SRS AIRBAG.
WARNING!
• Do not put anything on or around the airbag covers
or attempt to manually open them. You may damage
the airbags and you could be injured because the
airbags are not there to protect you. These protective
covers for the airbag cushions are designed to open
only when the airbags are inflating.
• If your vehicle is equipped with side airbags, do
not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the side airbags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could
be pushed into you, causing serious injury.
• If your vehicle is equipped with side airbags, do
not attach cup holders or any other objects on or
around the door. The inflating side airbag could
drive the object into occupants, causing serious
injury.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
Airbags inflate in moderate to high speed impacts. Along
with seat belts and pretensioners, front airbags work with
the driver inflatable knee blocker to provide improved
protection for the driver and front passenger. Side airbags
also work with seat belts to improve occupant protection.
The seat belts are designed to protect you in many types
of collisions. The front airbags deploy in moderate to
severe frontal collisions. If your vehicle is equipped, the
side airbag on the crash side of the vehicle is triggered in
moderate to severe side collisions. In certain types of
collisions, both the front and side airbags may be triggered. But even in collisions where the airbags work, you
need the seat belts to keep you in the right position for
the airbags to protect you properly.
NOTE: The passenger front airbag may not deploy even
when the driver front airbag has if the Occupant Classification System (refer to ⬙Occupant Classification System⬙
in this section) has determined the passenger seat is
empty or is occupied by someone that is classified in the
“child⬙ category. This could be a child, a teenager, or even
a small adult.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying airbag.
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in a rear seat.
Infants in rear facing child restraints should NEVER ride
in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger front airbag.
An airbag deployment can cause severe injury or death to
infants in that position.
Children that are not big enough to properly wear the
vehicle seat belt (see Section on Child Restraints) should
be secured in the rear seat in child restraints or beltpositioning booster seats. Older children who do not use
child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should
ride properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allow
children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under
their arm.
2
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If a child from 1 to 12 years old must ride in the front
passenger seat because the vehicle is crowded, move the
seat as far back as possible, and use the proper child
restraint. Refer to the section on Child Restraint.
You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
2. All occupants should wear their lap and shoulder
belts properly.
3. The driver and front passenger seats should be
moved back as far as practical to allow the front airbags
room to inflate.
4. If your vehicle has side airbags, do not lean against
the door, airbags will inflate forcefully into the space
between you and the door.
5. If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accomodate a disabled person, contact the
Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided under ⬙If
You Need Assistance⬙ in Section 9 of this manual.
WARNING!
• Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The airbags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions the airbags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belts even though you have
airbags.
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during front airbag deployment could cause
serious injury. Airbags need room to inflate. Sit
back, comfortably extending your arms to reach
the steering wheel or instrument panel.
• If the vehicle has side airbags, they also need room
to inflate. Do not lean against the door. Sit upright
in the center of the seat.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
The front airbag system consists of the following:
• Driver and Front Passenger Seat Belt Pretensioners
• Occupant Restraint Controller
• Occupant Classification System (OCS) for the Front
Passenger Seat
• Side Remote Acceleration Sensors (If equipped)
• Airbag Warning Light
− Occupant Classification Module
• Driver Airbag
− Passenger Airbag Disable (PAD) Indicator Light
• Passenger Airbag
− Weight Sensors
• Front Seat Mounted Side Airbags (If equipped)
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Interconnecting Wiring
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Driver Inflatable Knee Blocker
• Front Acceleration Sensors
How The Airbag System Works
• The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines
if a frontal collision is severe enough to require the
airbags to inflate. The front airbag inflators are designed to provide different rates of airbag inflation
from direction provided by the ORC. The ORC may
also modify the rate of inflation based on the occupant
size provided by the Occupant Classification Module.
The ORC will not detect roll over.
2
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The ORC also monitors the readiness of the electronic
parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in
the START or RUN positions. These include all of the
items listed above except the steering wheel and
column, and knee bolsters. If the key is in the OFF
position, in the ACC position, or not in the ignition,
the airbags are not on and will not inflate.
During a moderate-to-severe rear impact the ORC may
deploy the seat belt pretensioners alone.
Also, the ORC turns on the AIRBAG warning
light and PAD indicator light in the instrument
panel for 6 to 8 seconds for a self-check when
the ignition is first turned on. After the selfcheck, the AIRBAG warning light will turn off. The PAD
indicator light will function normally (Refer to ⬙Passenger Airbag Disable (PAD) Indicator Light⬙ in this section).
If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the
system, it turns on the AIRBAG warning light either
momentarily or continuously. A single chime will sound
if the light comes on again after initial start up.
WARNING!
Ignoring the AIRBAG light in your instrument panel
could mean you won’t have the airbags to protect you
in a collision. If the light does not come on, stays on
after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as you
drive, have the airbag system checked right away.
• The Occupant Classification System (OCS) is part of
a Federally regulated safety system required for this
vehicle. It is designed to turn off the front passenger
airbag for occupants that weigh less than a very small
adult.
NOTE: Children 12 years and under should always ride
buckled up in a rear seat in an appropriate child restraint.
• The OCS classifies an occupant using weight sensors
mounted in the base of the front passenger seat. Any
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
weight on the seat will be sensed by the system.
Objects hanging on the seat or other passengers pushing down on the seat will also be sensed. The weight of
an adult will cause the system to turn the airbag on. In
this case, the OCS has classified the occupant of the
seat as an adult. An adult occupant needs to sit in a
normal position (with their feet on or near the floor) in
order to be properly classified. Reclining the seat back
too far may change how an occupant is classified by
the OCS.
• The Passenger Airbag Disable (PAD) Indicator Light
(an amber light located in the center of the instrument
panel) tells the driver and front passenger when the
front passenger airbag is turned off. The PAD Indicator lamp illuminates the words ⬙PASS AIR BAG OFF⬙
to show that the front passenger airbag will not inflate
during a collision requiring airbags. When the right
front passenger seat is empty or when very light
objects are placed on the seat, the passenger air bag
will not inflate even though the Passenger Airbag
Disable (PAD) indicator lamp is not illuminated.
2
Passenger Airbag Disabled Light
• The PAD indictor light should not be illuminated when an adult passenger is properly seated in the front passenger seat. In
this case, the air bag is ready to be inflated if
a collision requiring an airbag occurs.
For all other occupants, the PAD indicator light will be
illuminated indicating that the front passenger airbag
is turned off and will not inflate.
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Even though this vehicle is equipped with an
occupant classification system, children 12 years and
under should always ride buckled up in a rear seat in an
appropriate child restraint (see section on child restraints).
WARNING!
Never place a rear facing infant seat in front of an
airbag. A deploying passenger airbag can cause death
or serious injury to a child in a rear facing infant seat.
Front Passenger
Seat Occupant
Passenger Airbag Disable
(PAD) Indicator
Light
OFF
ON
Airbag Status
Adult
ON
Child
OFF
Grocery Bags,
Heavy Briefcases
and Other RelaON
OFF
tively Light Objects
Empty or Very
OFF*
OFF
Small Objects
* Since the system senses weight, some small objects
will turn the PAD Indicator Light on.
Drivers and adult passengers should verify that the PAD
Indicator Light is not illuminated when an adult is riding
in the front passenger seat. If an adult occupant’s weight
is transferred to another part of the vehicle (like the door
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
or instrument panel), the weight sensors in the seat may
not properly classify the occupant. Objects lodged under
the seat or between the seat and the center console can
prevent the occupant’s weight from being measured
properly and may result in the occupant being improperly classified. Ensure that the front passenger seat back
does not touch anything placed on the second row of
seats because this can also affect occupant classification.
Also, if you fold down the seats in the second row check
to be sure they don’t touch the front passenger seat.
If the front passenger seat is damaged in any way, it
should only be serviced by an authorized dealer. If the
seat is removed (or even if the seat attachment bolts are
loosened or tightened in any way), take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer.
If there is a fault present in the OCS, the Airbag Warning
Light (a red light located in the center of the instrument
cluster directly in front of the driver) will be turned on.
This indicates that you should take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer. The Airbag Warning Light is turned on
whenever there is fault that can affect the operation of the
airbag system. If there is a fault present in the OCS, both
the PAD Indicator Light and the Airbag Warning Light
are illuminated to show that the passenger airbag is
turned off until the fault is cleared. If an object is lodged
under the seat and interferes with operation of the weight
sensors, a fault will occur which turns on both the PAD
Indicator Light and the Airbag Warning Light. Once the
lodged object is removed, the fault will be automatically
cleared after a short period of time.
• The Driver and Passenger Airbag/Inflator Units are
located in the center of the steering wheel and the right
side of the instrument panel. When the ORC detects a
collision requiring the airbags, it signals the inflator
units. A large quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to
inflate the front airbags. Different airbag inflation rates
2
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
may be possible based on collision severity and occupant size. The steering wheel hub trim cover and the
upper right side of the instrument panel separate and
fold out of the way as the bags inflate to their full size.
The bags fully inflate in about 50 - 70 milliseconds.
This is about half of the time it takes to blink your eyes.
The bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain
the driver and front passenger. The driver’s front
airbag gas is vented through vent holes in the sides of
the airbag. The passenger’s front airbag gas is vented
through vent holes in the sides of the airbag. In this
way the airbags do not interfere with your control of
the vehicle.
• The Occupant Classification Module (OCM) is located beneath the front passenger seat. The OCM
classifies the occupant into categories based on the
measurements made by the seat weight sensors. The
OCM communicates with the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). The ORC uses the occupant category to
determine whether the front passenger airbag should
be turned off. It also determines the rate of airbag
inflation during a collision.
• Your vehicle has four Weight Sensors located between
the seat and the floor pan. The weight sensors measure
applied weight and transfers that information to the
OCM.
• The Side Impact (SRS) Seat Mounted Side Airbags
(If equipped) are designed to activate only in certain
side collisions.
The ORC module determines if a side collision is
severe enough to require the side airbags to inflate.
The side airbag control module will not detect roll
over, front or rear collisions.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
The ORC Module monitors the readiness of the electronic
parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in the
START or ON positions. These include all of the items
previously mentioned.
In moderate to severe side collisions, the side airbag
inflator on the crash side of the vehicle is triggered,
releasing a quantity of nontoxic gas. The inflating side
airbag exits through the seat seam into the space between
the occupant and the door. The side airbag moves at a
very high speed and with such a high force, that it could
injure you if you are not seated properly, or if items are
positioned in the area where the side airbag inflates. This
especially applies to children.
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with left and right
side curtain air bags, do not install a clothing bar
mounted to the coat hooks (or similarly mounted). A
clothing bar will impede the proper performance of the
bags.
• When the ORC and the impact sensors detect a
collision requiring the Driver Inflatable Knee
Blocker, it signals the inflator unit. A quantity of
nontoxic gas is generated to inflate the Driver Inflatable Knee Blocker. The Driver Inflatable Knee Blocker
inflates rearward towards the driver’s knees to help
protect the knees and position you for the best interaction with the front airbag. The Driver Inflatable
Knee Blocker fully inflates in about 50 milliseconds,
this is only about half of the time it takes you to blink
your eyes. It then quickly deflates while helping to
protect the driver’s knees.
• The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees, and
position everyone for the best interaction with the
front airbag.
2
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The front passenger seat assembly contains critical components that affect the front passenger airbag deployment. Correctly functioning front passenger seat components are critical for the Occupant Classification System
(OCS) to properly classify the front passenger and calculate the proper airbag deployment. Do not make any
modifications to the front passenger seat components,
assembly, or to the seat cover.
The following requirements must be strictly adhered to:
• Do not modify the front passenger seat assembly or
components in any way.
• Do not modify the front seat center console or center
position seat in any way.
• Do not use prior or future model year seat covers not
designated for the specific model being repaired. Always use the correct seat cover specified for the vehicle.
• Do not replace the seat cover with an aftermarket seat
cover.
• Do not add a secondary seat cover other than those
approved by DaimlerChrysler/Mopar.
• At no time should any supplemental restraint system
(SRS) component or SRS related component or fastener
be modified or replaced with any part except those
which are approved by DaimlerChrysler/Mopar.
WARNING!
Unapproved modifications or service procedures to
the front passenger seat assembly, its related components, or seat cover may inadvertently change the
airbag deployment in case of a frontal crash. This
could result in death or serious injury to the front
seat passenger if the vehicle is involved in an accident. A modified vehicle may not comply with required Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
(FMVSS).
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
If A Deployment Occurs
The airbag systems are designed to deploy when the
airbag control modules detect a moderate-to-severe collision, to help restrain the driver and front passenger, and
then immediately deflate.
NOTE: A frontal collision that is not severe enough to
need airbag protection will not activate the system. This
does not mean something is wrong with the airbag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags, any
or all of the following may occur:
• The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abrasions and/or skin reddening to the driver and front
passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold. The
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those
you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a
few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
immediately. As the airbags deflate you may see some
smoke-like particles. The particles are a normal byproduct of the process that generates the nontoxic gas
used for airbag inflation. These airborne particles may
irritate the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin
or eye irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For
nose or throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the
irritation continues, see your doctor. If these particles
settle on your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.
• It is not advisable to drive your vehicle after the
airbags have deployed. If you are involved in another
collision, the airbags will not be in place to protect you.
2
68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Deployed airbags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the airbags,
seat belt pretensioners, and the front passenger seat
belt retractor assembly, replaced by an authorized
dealer as soon as possible. Also, have the Occupant
Classification System serviced as well.
Maintaining Your Airbag System
WARNING!
Modifications to any part of the airbag system could
cause it to fail when you need it. You could be
injured if the airbag system is not there to protect
you. Do not modify the components or wiring, including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the
steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side
of the instrument panel. Do not modify the front
bumper, vehicle body structure, or add aftermarket
side steps or running boards.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69
WARNING!
WARNING!
Do not attempt to modify any part of your advanced
airbag system. The airbag may inflate accidentally or
may not function properly if modifications are made.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any
advanced airbag system service. If your seat including your trim cover and cushion needs to be serviced
in any way (including removal or loosening/
tightening of seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle
to your authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary
to modify an advanced airbag system for persons
with disabilities, contact your authorized dealer.
• Do not place or hang any items such as add-on
video players on the front seat backs. The additional weight may cause the Occupant Classification System to be unable to correctly classify the
right front occupant. This could allow the passenger frontal airbag to inflate when it is not desired.
• You need proper knee impact protection in a
collision. Do not mount or locate any aftermarket
equipment on or behind the knee blocker panel.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the
airbag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an airbag system.
NOTE: Perchlorate Material – special handling may apply,
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.”
2
70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Airbag Light
You will want to have the airbags ready to inflate for your
protection in a collision. While the airbag system is
designed to be maintenance free, if any of the following
occurs, have an authorized dealer service the system
immediately.
prior to the moment of airbag deployment, or neardeployment, and up to a quarter second of high-speed
deceleration data during and/or after airbag deployment
or near-deployment. EDR data are ONLY recorded if an
airbag deploys, or nearly deploys, and are otherwise
unavailable.
• The AIRBAG light does not come on during the six to
eight seconds when the ignition switch is first turned
on.
NOTE:
1. A near-deployment event occurs when the airbag
sensor detects severe vehicle deceleration usually indicative of a crash, but not severe enough to warrant airbag
deployment.
• The light remains on after the six to eight second
interval.
• The light comes on and remains on while driving.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
In the event of an accident, your vehicle is designed to
record up to five - seconds of specific vehicle data
parameters (see list below) in an event data recorder
2. Under certain circumstances, EDR data may not be
recorded (e.g., loss of battery power).
In conjunction with other data gathered during a complete accident investigation, the electronic data may be
used by DaimlerChrysler and others to learn more about
the possible causes of crashes and associated injuries in
order to assess and improve vehicle performance. In
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71
addition to crash investigations initiated by
DaimlerChrysler, such investigations may be requested
by customers, insurance carriers, government officials,
and professional crash researchers, such as those associated with universities, and with hospital and insurance
organizations.
In the event that an investigation is undertaken by
DaimlerChrysler (regardless of initiative), the company
or its designated representative will first obtain permission of the appropriate custodial entity for the vehicle
(usually the vehicle owner or lessee) before accessing the
electronic data stored, unless ordered to download data
by a court with legal jurisdiction (i.e., pursuant to a
warrant). A copy of the data will be provided to the
custodial entity upon request. General data that does not
identify particular vehicles or crashes may be released for
incorporation in aggregate crash databases, such as those
maintained by the US government and various states.
Data of a potentially sensitive nature, such as would
identify a particular driver, vehicle, or crash, will be
treated confidentially. Confidential data will not be disclosed by DaimlerChrysler to any third party except
when:
1. Used for research purposes, such as to match data
with a particular crash record in an aggregate database,
provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter
preserved
2. Used in defense of
DaimlerChrysler product
litigation
involving
a
3. Requested by police under a legal warrant
4. Otherwise required by law
Data Parameters that May Be Recorded:
• Diagnostic trouble code(s) and warning lamp status
for electronically-controlled safety systems, including
the airbag system
2
72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• Airbag disable lamp status (if equipped)
• ⬙Time⬙ of airbag deployment (in terms of ignition
cycles and vehicle mileage)
• Airbag deployment level (if applicable)
• Impact acceleration and angle
• Seatbelt status
• Brake status (service and parking brakes)
• Accelerator status (including vehicle speed)
• Engine control status (including engine speed)
• Transmission gear selection
• Cruise control status
• Traction/stability control status
• Tire pressure monitoring system status
CHILD RESTRAINT
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times — babies and children, too. Every state in the
United States and all Canadian provinces require that
small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the
law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years and under should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seats, rather than in the front.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a tiny baby,
can become a missile inside the vehicle. The force
required to hold even an infant on your lap could
become so great that you could not hold the child, no
matter how strong you are. The child and others
could be badly injured. Any child riding in your
vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child’s
size.
Infants And Small Children
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat owner’s manual to ensure you have the correct seat
for your child. Use the restraint that is correct for your
child:
• Safety experts recommend that children ride
rearward-facing in the vehicle until they are at least
one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs (9 kg). Two types
of child restraints can be used rearward-facing: infant
carriers and ⬙convertible⬙ child seats. Both types of
child restraints are held in the vehicle by the lap/
shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage
system.
• This vehicle is not capable of accommodating the
installation of a car bed used for carrying newborn
babies at the right front passenger seat position. If a car
bed must be used to transport a newborn baby, the car
bed must be installed in the second seating row only.
• The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children who weigh up
to about 20 lbs (9 kg). ⬙Convertible⬙ child seats can be
used either rearward-facing or forward-facing in the
vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher
2
74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
weight limit in the rearward-facing direction than
infant carriers do, so they can be used rearward-facing
by children who weigh more than 9 kg (20 lbs) but are
less than one year old.
• Rearward-facing child seats must NEVER be used in
the front seat of a vehicle with a front passenger
airbag. An airbag deployment could cause severe
injury or death to infants in this position.
• Children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) and who
are older than one year can ride forward-facing in the
vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible
child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for
children who weigh 20 to 40 lbs (9 to 18 kg) and who
are older than one year. These child seats are also held
in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH
child restraint anchorage system.
• The belt-positioning booster seat is for children weighing more than 40 lbs (18 kg), but who are still too small
to fit the vehicle’s seat belts properly. If the child
cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle’s cushion
while the child’s back is against the seat back; they
should use a Belt Positioning Booster Seat. The child
and booster seat are held in the vehicle by the lap/
shoulder belt. (Some booster seats are equipped with a
front shield and are held in the vehicle by the lap
portion.)
NOTE:
For additional information
www.nhtsa.gov or www.seatcheck.org.
refer
to
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
• A rearward facing child restraint should only be
used in a rear seat. A rearward facing child restraint in the front seat may be struck by a deploying passenger airbag which may cause severe or
fatal injury to the infant.
Here are some tips on getting the most out of your child
restraint:
• Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. We also recommend that you make sure
that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle
where you will use it, before you buy it.
• The restraint must be appropriate for your child’s
weight and height. Check the label on the restraint for
weight and height limits.
• Carefully follow the instructions that come with the
restraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it may
not work when you need it.
The passenger seat belts are equipped with either
cinching latch plates or seat belt retractors that can be
switched to an automatic locking mode, which are
designed to keep the lap portion tight around the child
restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip.
If the seat belt has a cinching latch plate, pulling up on
the shoulder portion of the lap/shoulder belt will
tighten the belt. The cinching latch plate will keep the
belt tight, however, any seat belt system will loosen
with time, so check the belt occasionally and pull it
tight if necessary.
2
76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If the seat belt has a switchable retractor, please refer to
Automatic-Locking Retractor (ALR) in this section.
• In the rear seat, you may have trouble tightening the
lap/shoulder belt on the child restraint because the
buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path
opening on the restraint. Disconnect the latch plate
from the buckle and twist the short buckle end of the
belt several times to shorten it. Insert the latch plate
into the buckle with the release button facing out.
• If the belt still can’t be tightened, or if by pulling and
pushing on the restraint loosens the belt, disconnect
the latch plate from the buckle, turn the latch plate
around, and insert the latch plate into the buckle
again. If you still can’t make the child restraint secure,
try a different seating position.
• Buckle the child into the seat according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s directions.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the
vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle.
Don’t leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or
collision, it could strike the occupants or seat backs
and cause serious personal injury.
Automatic-Locking Retractor (ALR)
To operate the switchable retractor, pull the belt from the
retractor until there is enough to allow you to pass
through the child restraint and slide the latch plate into
the buckle. Then pull on the belt until it is all removed
from the retractor. Allow the belt to return into the
retractor, pulling on the excess webbing to tighten the lap
portion about the child restraint. Follow the instructions
of the child restraint manufacture.
NOTE: To reset this feature you must let all of the belt
webbing return into the retractor. You will not be able to
pull out more webbing until all of the webbing has been
returned back into the retractor.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77
Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH)
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tether for CHildren. The LATCH system
provides for the installation of the child restraint without
using the vehicle seat belt. All three rear seating positions
have lower and tether anchorages that are capable of
accommodating LATCH-compatible child seats having
flexible, webbing-mounted lower attachments. Child
seats with fixed lower attachments must be installed in
the outboard positions only. Regardless of the specific
type of lower attachment, NEVER install LATCHcompatible child seats such that two seats share a common lower anchorage. If you are installing LATCHcompatible child restraints in adjacent rear seating
positions, you can use the LATCH anchors or the vehicle’s seat belt for the outboard position, but you must use
the vehicle’s seat belt at the center position. If your child
restraints are not LATCH-compatible, you can only install the child restraints using the vehicle’s seat belts.
Please refer to, Installing the Child Restraint System for
typical installation instructions.
Latch Anchors
2
78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Child restraints systems having attachments designed to
connect to the lower anchorages are now available. Child
restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection
to the top tether anchorage have been available for some
time. In fact, many child restraint manufacturers will
provide add-on tether strap kits for some of their older
products. Tether anchorage kits are also available for
most older vehicles.
Because the lower anchorages are to be introduced to
passenger carrying vehicles over a period of years, child
restraint systems having attachments for those anchorages will continue to have features for installation in
vehicles using the lap or lap/shoulder belt. They will also
have tether straps, and you are urged to take advantage
of all of the available attachments provided with your
child restraint in any vehicle.
NOTE: When using the LATCH attaching system to
install a child restraint, please ensure that all seat belts
not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out
of reach of children. It is recommended that before
installing the child restraint, buckle the seat belt so the
seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of
reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child
restraint installation, instead of tucking the seat belt
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the
child restraint belt path and then buckle it. This should
stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child.
Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are
not toys and should not be played with, and never leave
your child unattended in the vehicle.
Installing the Child Restraint System
We urge that you carefully follow the directions of the
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Many,
but not all, restraint systems will be equipped with
separate straps on each side, with each having a hook or
connector and a means for adjusting the tension in the
strap. Forward-facing toddler restraints and some
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79
rearward-facing infant restraints will also be equipped
with a tether strap with a hook and means for adjusting
the tension in the strap.
2
In general, you will first loosen the adjusters on the lower
and tether straps so that you can more easily attach the
hook or connector to the lower and tether anchorages.
The tether strap should be routed under the center of the
head restraint and attached to the tether anchor on the
rear of the seat back. Then tighten all three straps as you
push the child restraint rearward and downward into the
seat.
Tether Strap Mounting
Not all child restraint systems will be installed as we
have described here. Again, carefully follow the instructions that come with the child restraint system.
NOTE: If your child restraint seat is not LATCH compatible, install the restraint using the vehicle seat belts.
80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchor position directly behind
the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether
strap.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seat back, should use the lap/shoulder belt in a rear seat.
• Make sure that the child is upright in the seat.
• The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug
as possible.
• Check belt fit periodically. A child’s squirming or
slouching can move the belt out of position.
• If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the
child closer to the center of the vehicle. Never allow a
child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind
their back.
Transporting Pets
Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS (CONVERTIBLE)
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems. These include:
If you will be carrying children too small for adult-size
seat belts, your seat belts or the LATCH feature also, can
be used to hold infant and child restraint systems.
• Front and rear seat belts for all passengers
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
• Front airbags for both the driver and front passenger
• Pretensioning and load-limiting retractors for the front
seat belts.
• Knee Blocker panels for front seat occupants.
• Supplemental front seat mounted side Head/Thorax
airbags for both the driver and front passenger (if
equipped).
• Front seat belt retractors that incorporate pretensioners to enhance occupant protection by managing occupant energy during an impact event.
WARNING!
In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled
up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other
passengers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle.
Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are
buckled up properly.
2
82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
LAP/SHOULDER BELTS
All the seats in your vehicle are equipped with Lap/
Shoulder Belts.
The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during
very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the
shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under
normal conditions. But in a collision, the belt will lock
and reduce the risk of your striking the inside of the
vehicle or being thrown out.
WARNING!
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83
WARNING!
WARNING!
• Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
belts are designed to go around the large bones of
your body. These are the strongest parts of your
body and can take the forces of a collision the best.
Two people should never be belted into a single seat
belt. People belted together can crash into one another in an accident, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
• Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You might
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to
wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
seat, next to your arm. Grasp the latch plate and pull out
the belt. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as
necessary to allow the belt to go around your lap.
2
84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
Removing Slack From Belt
3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85
WARNING!
A belt that is worn under your arm is very dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause internal
injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder bones.
Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a collision.
Latch Plate To Buckle
A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well. In
a sudden stop you could move too far forward,
increasing the possibility of injury. Wear your seat
belt snugly.
2
86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up
on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight,
tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug belt
reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision.
WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
internal injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t be
at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted belt can’t do its job as well. In a collision
it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt is straight.
If you can’t straighten a belt in your vehicle, take it to
your dealer and have it fixed.
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor
will withdraw any slack in the belt.
Removing Slack From Belt
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position.
If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to
allow the belt to retract fully.
The seat belt webbing guide should be used to improve
seat belt accessibility. The seat belt can be removed from
the guide to allow for easier access to the rear seats.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not
disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have
been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.).
Seat Belt Webbing Guide
NOTE: The manufacturer recommends that the seat belt
is routed through the seat belt webbing guide when
using the seat belt.
Seat Belt Webbing Guide
2
88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
LAP/SHOULDER SEAT BELT UNTWISTING
PROCEDURE
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
2. At about six to twelve inches (15 to 30 cm) above the
latch plate, grasp and twist the belt webbing 180° to
create a fold that begins immediately above the latch
plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the
latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing.
SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS
The seat belts for both front seating positions are
equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision.
These devices improve the performance of the seat belt
by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant early
in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occupants,
including those in child restraints.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the front airbag control module (see Airbag Section). Like the front airbags,
the pretensioners are single use items. After a collision
that is severe enough to deploy the airbags and pretensioners, both must be replaced.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89
ENHANCED SEAT BELT REMINDER SYSTEM
(BELTALERT姞)
If the driver’s or front passenger’s seat belt has not been
buckled within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle and if
the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), the
Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert威) will alert the
driver or front passenger to buckle their seat belt. The
driver should also instruct all other occupants to buckle
their seat belts. Once the warning is triggered, the
Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert威) will continue to
chime and flash the Seat Belt Warning Light for 96
seconds or until the driver’s or front passenger’s seat belt
is buckled. The Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert威)
will be reactivated if the driver’s or front passenger’s seat
belt is unbuckled for more than 10 seconds and the
vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h).
NOTE:
• The Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert威) can be
enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer.
• DaimlerChrysler does not recommend deactivating
the Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert威).
If the Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert威) is deactivated, the Seat Belt Warning Light will continue to
illuminate while the driver seat belt remains unfastened.
SEAT BELTS AND PREGNANT WOMEN
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts
throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is
the best way to keep the baby safe.
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the force if there is a collision.
2
90 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
DRIVER AND FRONT PASSENGER
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
This vehicle has airbags for both the driver and front
passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint
systems. The driver’s front airbag is mounted in the
center of the steering wheel. The passenger’s front airbag
is mounted in the instrument panel, above the glove
compartment. The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on
the airbag covers.
Front Panel SRS Features
1 — Driver Airbag
2 — Passenger Airbag
3 — Passenger Knee Blocker
4 — Driver Knee Blocker
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 91
Head/Thorax airbags (if equipped) are located inside the
driver and front passenger seats, and their covers are also
labeled SRS AIRBAG.
2
NOTE: Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim; but they will open to allow airbag deployment.
WARNING!
• Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee blocker
panel in any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee blocker
panel such as alarm lights, stereos, citizens band
radios etc.
SRS Airbag Label
92 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Do not put anything on or around the airbag
covers or attempt to manually open them. You may
damage the airbags and you could be injured
because the airbags are not there to protect you.
These protective covers for the airbag cushions are
designed to open only when the airbags are inflating.
• If your vehicle is equipped with Head/Thorax
airbags, do not use accessory seat covers or place
objects between you and the side airbags; the
performance could be adversely affected and/or
objects could be pushed into you, causing serious
injury.
Airbags inflate in moderate to high speed impacts. Along
with seat belts and pretensioners, front airbags work with
knee impact blocker panels to provide improved protection for the driver and front passenger.
The seat belts are designed to protect you in many types
of collisions. The front airbags deploy in moderate to
severe frontal collisions. If your vehicle is equipped, the
Head/Thorax airbag on the crash side of the vehicle is
triggered in moderate to severe side collisions. In certain
types of collisions, both the front seat and Head/Thorax
airbags may be triggered. But even in collisions where
the airbags work, you need the seat belts to keep you in
the right position for the airbags to protect you properly.
NOTE: The passenger front airbag may not deploy even
when the driver front airbag has if the Occupant Classification System (refer to ⬙Occupant Classification System⬙
in this section) has determined the passenger seat is
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 93
empty or is occupied by someone that is classified in the
“child” category. This could be a child, a teenager, or
even a small adult.
ride properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allow
children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under
their arm.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying airbag.
You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in a rear seat.
2. All occupants should wear their lap and shoulder belts
properly.
Infants in rear facing child restraints should NEVER ride
in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger front airbag.
An airbag deployment can cause severe injury or death to
infants in that position.
3. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
back as far as practical to allow the front airbags room to
inflate.
Children that are not big enough to properly wear the
vehicle seat belt (see Section on Child Restraints) should
be secured in the rear seat in child restraints or beltpositioning booster seats. Older children who do not use
child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should
4. If your vehicle has side airbags, do not lean against the
door, airbags will inflate forcefully into the space between you and the door.
5. If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact the
Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided under ⬙If
You Need Assistance⬙ in Section 9 of this manual.
2
94 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
The front airbag system consists of the following:
• Occupant Restraint Controller
• Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The airbags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions the airbags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belts even though you have
airbags.
• Side Remote Acceleration Sensors (If Equipped)
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during front airbag deployment could cause
serious injury. Airbags need room to inflate. Sit
back, comfortably extending your arms to reach
the steering wheel or instrument panel.
• Front Seat Mounted Head/Thorax Airbags (if
equipped)
• If the vehicle has Head/Thorax airbags, they also
need room to inflate. Do not lean against the door.
Sit upright in the center of the seat.
• Driver and Front Passenger Knee Impact Blockers
• Airbag Warning Light
• Driver Airbag
• Passenger Airbag
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Front Acceleration Sensors
• Driver and Front Passenger Seat Belt Pretensioners
• Passenger Airbag Disable (PAD) Indicator Light
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 95
The Head/Thorax airbag system (if equipped) consists
of the following:
• AIRBAG Readiness Light (shared with the front airbag
system)
• Front Seat— side mounted Head/Thorax Airbags — if
equipped
• Airbag Control Module (shared with the front airbag
system)
• Side impact sensors
How The Airbag System Works
• The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines
if a frontal collision is severe enough to require the
airbags to inflate. The front airbag inflators are designed to provide different rates of airbag inflation
from direction provided by the ORC. The ORC may
also modify the rate of inflation based on the occupant
size provided by the Occupant Classification Module.
The ORC will not detect roll over.
The ORC also monitors the readiness of the electronic
parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in
the START or RUN positions. These include all of the
items listed above except the steering wheel and
column, and knee impact blockers. If the key is in the
OFF position, in the ACC position, or not in the
ignition, the airbags are not on and will not inflate.
During a moderate-to-severe rear impact the ORC may
deploy the seat belt pretensioners alone.
Also, the ORC turns on the AIRBAG warning
light and PAD indicator light in the instrument
panel for six to eight seconds for a self-check
when the ignition is first turned on. After the
self-check, the AIRBAG warning light will turn off. The
PAD indicator light will function normally (Refer to
2
96 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
⬙Passenger Airbag Disable (PAD) Indicator Light⬙ in this
section). If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of
the system, it turns on the AIRBAG warning light either
momentarily or continuously. A single chime will sound
if the light comes on again after initial start up.
WARNING!
Ignoring the AIRBAG light in your instrument panel
could mean you won’t have the airbags to protect you
in a collision. If the light does not come on, stays on
after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as you
drive, have the airbag system checked right away.
NOTE: Children 12 years and under should always ride
buckled up in a rear seat in an appropriate child restraint.
• When the front airbag control module detects a collision requiring the front airbags, it signals the inflator
units. A large quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to
inflate the front airbags. The front airbag covers separate and fold out of the way as the front airbags inflate
to their full size. The front airbags fully inflate in about
50 milliseconds. This is only about half of the time it
takes you to blink your eyes. The front airbags then
quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and
front passenger. The driver’s and passenger’s front
airbag gas is vented through holes in the sides of the
airbag. In this way the front airbags do not interfere
with your control of the vehicle.
• The Passenger Airbag Disable (PAD) Indicator Light
(an amber light located in the center of the instrument
panel) tells the driver and front passenger when the
front passenger airbag is turned off. The PAD Indicator lamp illuminates the words ⬙PASS AIR BAG OFF⬙
to show that the front passenger airbag will not inflate
during a collision requiring airbags. When the right
front passenger seat is empty or when very light
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 97
objects are placed on the seat, the passenger air bag
will not inflate even though the PAD indicator lamp is
not illuminated.
For all other occupants, the PAD indicator light will be
illuminated indicating that the front passenger airbag
is turned off and will not inflate.
NOTE: Even though this vehicle is equipped with an
occupant classification system, children 12 years and
under should always ride buckled up in a rear seat in an
appropriate child restraint (see section on child restraints).
Passenger Airbag Disabled Light
• The PAD indictor light should not be illuminated when teenagers, most children in a
forward facing child restraint or booster
seats, most children that can properly wear
the vehicle’s seat belt, and when an adult passenger is
properly seated in the front passenger seat. In this
case, the air bag is ready to be inflated if a collision
requiring an airbag occurs.
WARNING!
Never place a rear facing infant seat in front of an
airbag. A deploying passenger airbag can cause death
or serious injury to a child in a rear facing infant seat.
2
98 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Passenger Airbag Disable (PAD) System
Front Passenger Indicator Light
Airbag Status
Adult
OFF
ON
Child
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Grocery Bags,
Heavy Briefcases
and Other Relatively Light Objects
Empty or Very
OFF*
OFF
Small Objects
* Since the system senses weight, some small objects
will turn the PAD Indicator Light on.
Drivers and adult passengers should verify that the PAD
Indicator Light is not illuminated when an adult is riding
in the front passenger seat. If an adult occupant’s weight
is transferred to another part of the vehicle (like the door
or instrument panel), the weight sensors in the seat may
not properly classify the occupant. Objects lodged under
the seat or between the seat and the center console can
prevent the occupant’s weight from being measured
properly and may result in the occupant being improperly classified. Ensure that the front passenger seat back
does not touch anything placed on the second row of
seats because this can also affect occupant classification.
Also, if you fold down the seats in the second row check
to be sure they don’t touch the front passenger seat.
If the front passenger seat is damaged in any way, it
should only be serviced by an authorized dealer. If the
seat is removed (or even if the seat attachment bolts are
loosened or tightened in any way), take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer.
If there is a fault present in the Airbag Warning Light (a
red light located in the center of the instrument cluster
directly in front of the driver) will be turned on. This
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 99
indicates that you should take the vehicle to an authorized dealer. The Airbag Warning Light is turned on
whenever there is fault that can affect the operation of the
airbag system. If there is a fault present in the PAD
Indicator Light the Airbag Warning Light remains illuminated to show that the passenger airbag is turned off
until the fault is cleared. If an object is lodged under the
seat and interferes with operation of the weight sensors,
a fault will occur which turns on both the PAD Indicator
Light and the Airbag Warning Light. Once the lodged
object is removed, the fault will be automatically cleared
after a short period of time.
• The Driver and Passenger Airbag/Inflator Units are
located in the center of the steering wheel and the right
side of the instrument panel. When the ORC detects a
collision requiring the airbags, it signals the inflator
units. A large quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to
inflate the front airbags. Different airbag inflation rates
may be possible based on collision severity and occupant size. The steering wheel hub trim cover and the
upper right side of the instrument panel separate and
fold out of the way as the bags inflate to their full size.
The bags fully inflate in about 50 - 70 milliseconds.
This is about half of the time it takes to blink your eyes.
The bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain
the driver and front passenger. The driver’s and passenger’s front airbag gas is vented through holes in the
sides of the airbag. In this way the airbags do not
interfere with your control of the vehicle.
• The Occupant Classification Module (OCM) is located beneath the front passenger seat. The OCM
classifies the occupant into categories based on the
measurements made by the seat weight sensors. The
OCM communicates with the ORC. The ORC uses the
occupant category to determine whether the front
passenger airbag should be turned off. It also determines the rate of airbag inflation during a collision.
2
100 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• Your vehicle has four Weight Sensors located between
the seat and the floor pan. The weight sensors measure
applied weight and transfers that information to the
OCM.
• The Head/Thorax Airbag and Supplemental Restraint Systems are designed to activate only in certain
side collisions. The ORC module determines if a side
collision is severe enough to require the Head/Thorax
airbags to inflate. The side airbag control module will
not detect roll over, front or rear collisions.
The ORC Module monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the system whenever the ignition switch
is in the START or ON positions. These include all of
the items listed under “The Side Airbag System”, on
vehicles equipped, consists of the following”.
In moderate to severe side collisions, the side airbag
inflator on the crash side of the vehicle is triggered,
releasing a quantity of nontoxic gas. The inflating Head/
Thorax Airbags exit through the seat seam into the space
between the occupant and the door. The Head/Thorax
airbags moves at a very high speed and with such a high
force, that it could injure you if you are not seated
properly, or if items are positioned in the area where the
side airbag inflates. This especially applies to children.
The following requirements must be strictly adhered to:
• Do not modify the front passenger seat assembly or
components in any way.
• Do not modify the front seat center console or center
position seat in any way.
• Do not use prior or future model year seat covers not
designated for the specific model being repaired. Always use the correct seat cover specified for the
vehicle.
• Do not replace the seat cover with an aftermarket seat
cover.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 101
• Do not add a secondary seat cover other than those
approved by DaimlerChrysler/Mopar.
• At no time should any supplemental restraint system
(SRS) component or SRS related component or fastener be modified or replaced with any part except
those which are approved by DaimlerChrysler/
Mopar.
WARNING!
Unapproved modifications or service procedures to the
front passenger seat assembly, its related components,
or seat cover may inadvertently change the airbag
deployment in case of a frontal crash. This could result
in death or serious injury to the front seat passenger if
the vehicle is involved in an accident. A modified
vehicle may not comply with required Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS).
If A Deployment Occurs
The airbag systems are designed to deploy when the
airbag control modules detect a moderate-to-severe collision, to help restrain the driver and front passenger, and
then immediately deflate.
NOTE: A collision that is not severe enough to need
airbag protection will not activate the system. This does
not mean something is wrong with the airbag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags, any
or all of the following may occur:
• The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abrasions and/or skin reddening to the driver and front
passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold. The
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those
you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
2
102 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a
few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
immediately.
• As the airbags deflate you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the nontoxic gas used for airbag
inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin,
eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation,
rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat
irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues,
see your doctor. If these particles settle on your
clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.
• It is not advisable to drive your vehicle after the
airbags have deployed. If you are involved in another
collision, the airbags will not be in place to protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed airbags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the airbags,
seat belt pretensioners, front passenger seat belt
retractor assembly, and Occupant Classification System replaced and/or serviced by an authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 103
Maintaining Your Airbag System
WARNING!
Modifications to any part of the airbag system could
cause it to fail when you need it. You could be
injured if the airbag system is not there to protect
you. Do not modify the components or wiring, including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the
steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side
of the instrument panel. Do not modify the front
bumper, vehicle body structure, or add aftermarket
side steps or running boards.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to modify any part of your advanced
airbag system. The airbag may inflate accidentally or
may not function properly if modifications are made.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any
advanced airbag system service. If your seat including your trim cover and cushion needs to be serviced
in any way (including removal or loosening/
tightening of seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle
to your authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary
to modify an advanced airbag system for persons
with disabilities, contact your authorized dealer.
2
104 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
NOTE: Perchlorate Material – special handling may apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.”
• Do not place or hang any items such as add-on
video players on the right front passenger seat
back. The additional weight may cause the Occupant Classification System to be unable to correctly classify the right front occupant. This could
allow the passenger frontal airbag to inflate when
it is not desired.
Airbag Light
You will want to have the airbags ready to inflate for your
protection in a collision. While the airbag system is
designed to be maintenance free, if any of the following
occurs, have an authorized dealer service the system
immediately.
• You need proper knee impact protection in a
collision. Do not mount or locate any aftermarket
equipment on or behind the knee impact blocker
panels.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the
airbag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an airbag system.
• The AIRBAG light does not come on during the six to
eight seconds when the ignition switch is first turned
on.
• The light remains on after the six to eight second
interval.
• The light comes on and remains on while driving.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 105
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
In the event of an accident, your vehicle is designed to
record up to five seconds of specific vehicle data parameters (see list below) in an event data recorder prior to the
moment of airbag deployment, or near-deployment, and
up to a quarter second of high-speed deceleration data
during and/or after air bag deployment or neardeployment. EDR data are ONLY recorded if an airbag
deploys, or nearly deploys, and are otherwise unavailable.
NOTE:
1. A near-deployment event occurs when the airbag
sensor detects severe vehicle deceleration usually indicative of a crash, but not severe enough to warrant airbag
deployment.
2. Under certain circumstances, EDR data may not be
recorded (e.g., loss of battery power).
In conjunction with other data gathered during a complete accident investigation, the electronic data may be
used by DaimlerChrysler and others to learn more about
the possible causes of crashes and associated injuries in
order to assess and improve vehicle performance. In
addition to crash investigations initiated by
DaimlerChrysler, such investigations may be requested
by customers, insurance carriers, government officials,
and professional crash researchers, such as those associated with universities, and with hospital and insurance
organizations.
In the event that an investigation is undertaken by
DaimlerChrysler (regardless of initiative), the company
or its designated representative will first obtain permission of the appropriate custodial entity for the vehicle
(usually the vehicle owner or lessee) before accessing the
electronic data stored, unless ordered to download data
by a court with legal jurisdiction (i.e., pursuant to a
warrant). A copy of the data will be provided to the
2
106 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
custodial entity upon request. General data that does not
identify particular vehicles or crashes may be released for
incorporation in aggregate crash databases, such as those
maintained by the US government and various states.
Data of a potentially sensitive nature, such as would
identify a particular driver, vehicle, or crash, will be
treated confidentially. Confidential data will not be disclosed by DaimlerChrysler to any third party except
when:
1. Used for research purposes, such as to match data
with a particular crash record in an aggregate database,
provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter
preserved
2. Used in defense of
DaimlerChrysler product
litigation
involving
a
Data Parameters that May Be Recorded:
• Diagnostic trouble code(s) and warning lamp status
for electronically-controlled safety systems, including
the airbag system
• Airbag disable lamp status (if equipped)
• ⬙Time⬙ of airbag deployment (in terms of ignition
cycles and vehicle mileage)
• Airbag deployment level (if applicable)
• Impact acceleration and angle
• Seatbelt status
• Brake status (service and parking brakes)
• Accelerator status (including vehicle speed)
3. Requested by police under a legal warrant
• Engine control status (including engine speed)
4. Otherwise required by law
• Transmission gear selection
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 107
• Cruise control status
• Traction/stability control status
• Tire pressure monitoring system status
CHILD RESTRAINT
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times — babies and children, too. Every state in the
United States and all Canadian provinces require that
small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the
law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years and under should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seats, rather than in the front.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a tiny baby,
can become a missile inside the vehicle. The force
required to hold even an infant on your lap could
become so great that you could not hold the child, no
matter how strong you are. The child and others
could be badly injured. Any child riding in your
vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child’s
size.
Infants And Small Children
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat owner’s manual to ensure you have the correct seat
for your child. Use the restraint that is correct for your
child:
2
108 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• Safety experts recommend that children ride
rearward-facing in the vehicle until they are at least
one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs (9 kg). Two types
of child restraints can be used rearward-facing: infant
carriers and ⬙convertible⬙ child seats. Both types of
child restraints are held in the vehicle by the lap/
shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage
system.
• This vehicle is not capable of accommodating the
installation of a car bed used for carrying newborn
babies at the right front passenger seat position. If a car
bed must be used to transport a newborn baby, the car
bed must be installed in the second seating row only.
• The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children who weigh up
to about 20 lbs (9 kg). ⬙Convertible⬙ child seats can be
used either rearward-facing or forward-facing in the
vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher
weight limit in the rearward-facing direction than
infant carriers do, so they can be used rearward-facing
by children who weigh more than 9 kg (20 lbs) but are
less than one year old.
• Rearward-facing child seats must NEVER be used in
the front seat of a vehicle with a front passenger
airbag. An airbag deployment could cause severe
injury or death to infants in this position.
• Children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) and who
are older than one year can ride forward-facing in the
vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible
child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for
children who weigh 20 to 40 lbs (9 to 18 kg) and who
are older than one year. These child seats are also held
in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH
child restraint anchorage system.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 109
• The belt-positioning booster seat is for children weighing more than 40 lbs (18 kg), but who are still too small
to fit the vehicle’s seat belts properly. If the child
cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle’s cushion
while the child’s back is against the seat back; they
should use a Belt Positioning Booster Seat. The child
and booster seat are held in the vehicle by the lap/
shoulder belt. (Some booster seats are equipped with a
front shield and are held in the vehicle by the lap
portion.)
NOTE:
For additional information
www.nhtsa.gov or www.seatcheck.org.
refer
to
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
• A rearward facing child restraint should only be
used in a rear seat. A rearward facing child restraint in the front seat may be struck by a deploying passenger airbag which may cause severe or
fatal injury to the infant.
Here are some tips on getting the most out of your child
restraint:
• Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
2
110 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Standards. We also recommend that you make sure
that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle
where you will use it, before you buy it.
• The restraint must be appropriate for your child’s
weight and height. Check the label on the restraint for
weight and height limits.
all removed from the retractor. Allow the belt to return
into the retractor, as the belt retracts, you will hear a
clicking sound. This indicates that the seat belt is now in
the automatic locking mode. Pull on the excess webbing
to tighten the lap portion about the child restraint. Follow
the instructions of the child restraint manufacture.
• Carefully follow the instructions that come with the
restraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it may
not work when you need it.
NOTE: To reset this feature you must let all of the belt
webbing return into the retractor. You will not be able to
pull out more webbing until all of the webbing has been
returned back into the retractor.
The passenger seat belts are equipped with seat belt
retractors that can be switched to an automatic locking
mode, which are designed to keep the lap portion tight
around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to
use a locking clip.
• In the rear seat, you may have trouble tightening the
lap/shoulder belt on the child restraint because the
buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path
opening on the restraint. Disconnect the latch plate
from the buckle and twist the short buckle end of the
belt several times to shorten it. Insert the latch plate
into the buckle with the release button facing out.
Pull the belt from the retractor until there is enough to
allow you to pass through the child restraint and slide the
latch plate into the buckle. Then pull on the belt until it is
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 111
• If the belt still can’t be tightened, or if by pulling and
pushing on the restraint loosens the belt, disconnect
the latch plate from the buckle, turn the latch plate
around, and insert the latch plate into the buckle
again. If you still can’t make the child restraint secure,
try a different seating position.
using the vehicle seat belt. Both rear seating positions
have exclusive lower anchorages located at the rear of the
seat cushion. They are round bars, part of the seat and
body structure, and are readily visible. In addition, there
are two tether strap anchorages located behind the rear
seat head form, in the convertible top storage area.
• Buckle the child into the seat according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s directions.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the
vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle.
Don’t leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or
collision, it could strike the occupants or seat backs
and cause serious personal injury.
Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH)
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tether for CHildren. The LATCH system
provides for the installation of the child restraint without
Latch Anchors
2
112 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Child restraints systems having attachments designed to
connect to the lower anchorages are now available. Child
restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection
to the top tether anchorage have been available for some
time. In fact, many child restraint manufacturers will
provide add-on tether strap kits for some of their older
products. Tether anchorage kits are also available for
most older vehicles.
Because the lower anchorages are to be introduced to
passenger carrying vehicles over a period of years, child
restraint systems having attachments for those anchorages will continue to have features for installation in
vehicles using the lap or lap/shoulder belt. They will also
have tether straps, and you are urged to take advantage
of all of the available attachments provided with your
child restraint in any vehicle.
NOTE: When using the LATCH attaching system to
install a child restraint, please ensure that all seat belts
not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out
of reach of children. It is recommended that before
installing the child restraint, buckle the seat belt so the
seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of
reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child
restraint installation, instead of tucking the seat belt
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the
child restraint belt path and then buckle it. This should
stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child.
Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are
not toys and should not be played with, and never leave
your child unattended in the vehicle.
Installing the Child Restraint System
We urge that you carefully follow the directions of the
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Many,
but not all, restraint systems will be equipped with
separate straps on each side, with each having a hook or
connector and a means for adjusting the tension in the
strap. Forward-facing toddler restraints and some
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 113
rearward-facing infant restraints will also be equipped
with a tether strap with a hook and means for adjusting
the tension in the strap.
2
In general, you will first loosen the adjusters on the lower
and tether straps so that you can more easily attach the
hook or connector to the lower and tether anchorages.
The tether strap should be routed over the center of the
head form and attached to the tether anchor, located
behind the rear seat head form, in the convertible top
storage area. Then tighten all three straps as you push the
child restraint rearward and downward into the seat.
NOTE: To gain access to the anchorages, locate the child
tether anchorage decals on the carpet behind the rear seat
head forms and use a small screwdriver to pry the carpet
flap open. The carpet flap is attached in two different
places.
Tether Strap Mounting
Not all child restraint systems will be installed as we
have described here. Again, carefully follow the instructions that come with the child restraint system.
NOTE: If your child restraint seat is not LATCH compatible, install the restraint using the vehicle seat belts.
114 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchor position directly behind
the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether
strap.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seat back, should use the lap/shoulder belt in a rear seat.
• Make sure that the child is upright in the seat.
• The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug
as possible.
• Check belt fit periodically. A child’s squirming or
slouching can move the belt out of position.
• If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the
child closer to the center of the vehicle. Never allow a
child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind
their back.
Transporting Pets
Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 115
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine in
your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 mi (500 km). After
the initial 60 mi (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80
or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration, within the
limits of local traffic laws, contributes to a good break-in.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy-conserving type lubricant. Oil
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For
the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to
“Maintenance Procedures” in Section 7 of this manual.
NON-DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS
MUST NEVER BE USED.
A new engine may consume some oil during its first few
thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be
considered as a normal part of the break-in and not
interpreted as an indication of difficulty.
SAFETY TIPS
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO) which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO)
follow the safety tips below.
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined
areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or
out of the area.
2
116 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine
running, adjust your heating or cooling controls to force
outside air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.
WARNING!
If you are required to drive with the deck lid/liftgate
open, make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed.
DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
a collision if they have been damaged (bent retractor, torn
webbing, etc. If there is any question regarding belt or
retractor condition, replace the belt.
Airbag Light
The light should come on and remain on for 6 to 8
seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned ON. If the LED is not lit during starting, have it
checked. If the light stays on or comes on while driving,
have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 117
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear or uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread. Inspect tread and sidewall for cuts or
cracks. Check wheel nuts for tightness, and tires (including spare) for proper pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights
while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high
beam indicator lights on the instrument panel.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or fuel, power steering fluid or brake
fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should be located and
corrected immediately.
2
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
3
䡵 Convertible Top Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
▫ Outside Mirror—Driver’s Side . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
▫ To Lower The Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
▫ Outside Mirror—Passenger’s Side . . . . . . . . . . 136
▫ To Raise The Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
▫ Electric Remote-Control Mirrors —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
▫ Convertible Top Boot Cover Installation–If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
▫ Convertible Top Boot Cover Removal And
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped . . . 138
▫ Sun Visor Sliding Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
▫ Convertible Top Manual Override . . . . . . . . . 134
䡵 Hands–Free Communication (UConnect™) — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
䡵 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
▫ Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped . . . . . 135
▫ Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ UConnect™ System Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
▫ Folding Rear Seat (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
▫ Folding Rear Seat (Convertible) . . . . . . . . . . . 173
▫ Things You Should Know About Your
UConnect™ System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
▫ Tumbling Rear Seat (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
▫ Tumbling Rear Seat (Convertible) . . . . . . . . . . 177
▫ Rear Seat Removal (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
䡵 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
▫ Front Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
䡵 To Open And Close The Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
▫ Power Seat Adjuster — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 165
䡵 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
▫ Manual Lumbar — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 166
▫ Map/Reading Lights (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
▫ Folding Front Passenger Seat — If Equipped . . 167
▫ Map/Reading Lights (Convertible) . . . . . . . . . 185
▫ Driver’s Seat Back Tilt — If Equipped . . . . . . . 167
▫ Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
▫ Passenger Seat Back Tilt (Easy Entry System) —
Convertible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
▫ Headlights, Parking Lights, Instrument Panel
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
▫ Adjustable Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
▫ Daytime Running Lights (DRL) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121
▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
▫ To Set At A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
▫ Highbeam/Lowbeam Select Switch . . . . . . . . . 189
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
▫ Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
▫ Manual Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
䡵 Windshield Wipers And Washers . . . . . . . . . . . 190
▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
▫ Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
䡵 Garage Door Opener — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 197
▫ Mist Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
▫ Programming HomeLink威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
▫ Windshield Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
▫ Gate Operator/Canadian Programming . . . . . 201
▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
▫ Using HomeLink威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
䡵 Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
▫ Reprogramming A Single HomeLink威
Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
䡵 Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped . . . . . . 194
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
3
122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
䡵 Rear Shelf Panel— If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
▫ Position 1 (Top) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
䡵 Power Sunroof (Sedan Only) — If Equipped . . . . 204
▫ Position 2 (Middle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
▫ Express Open Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
▫ Position 3 (Floor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
▫ Position 4 (Vertical) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
▫ Position 5 (Table) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
䡵 Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
䡵 Roof Luggage Rack — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 215
▫ Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off . . . . . . . 208
䡵 Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
䡵 Console Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
▫ Electric Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . 217
䡵 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
▫ Rear Wiper/Washer Switch (Sedan Models
Only) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
▫ Center Console/Armrest Storage Bin . . . . . . . 209
▫ Storage Pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123
CONVERTIBLE TOP OPERATION
WARNING!
The convertible top does not provide the structural
protection that a reinforced metal roof does, and the
fabric top cannot be expected to prevent the ejection
of the occupants of a vehicle in a collision. Therefore
it is important that all occupants wear their seat belts
at all times when riding in a convertible. Studies
have shown that it is generally safer to remain inside
a vehicle during a collision, than to be ejected from
the vehicle.
To Lower The Top:
NOTE: Thoroughly dry the convertible top and top
storage area, prior to leaving the top lowered for an
extended period of time. This will help prevent possible
mildew build-up.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the convertible top or its components, your vehicle is equipped with a feature that
prevents convertible top operation at speeds over 10
mph (16 km/h).
3
124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
To fully insure that no damage occurs, be sure that
the vehicle is at a complete stop with the gear selector
in the Park position (automatic transaxle) or in the
Neutral position (manual transaxle) before lowering
or raising the top.
To avoid damage to either the top or the rear window,
check the top storage area at the rear of the vehicle
interior to be sure that it is clear of debris or other
items. Be sure that child seat flip up bars are lowered.
Do not use the top storage area for other storage
purposes.
CAUTION!
Do not operate the convertible top with ice or snow
build-up on the top. Damage to the top may occur.
NOTE: When closing the convertible top all windows
will drop slightly from the full up position.
1. Turn the ignition key to the ON position.
2. Release the top from the windshield header by pulling
down on the latch handle and turning the latch handle
clockwise until it stops.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125
the Power Top Switch lightly in the first detent position
will lower the windows slightly and the convertible top
to the full down position. Pressing and holding the
switch in the second detent position will lower all four
windows completely and the top to the full down position.
Releasing Convertible Top Latches
3. Press the Power Top Switch to lower the top just
enough to disengage the top pins from the header, turn
the handle counterclockwise and raise the handle to the
stowed position.
NOTE: The Power Top Switch has two detent positions
for lowering the convertible top. Pressing and holding
Convertible Top Switch
3
126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
4. Continue pressing the Power Top Switch until the
convertible top is lowered completely.
5. Install the Convertible Top Boot Cover, if equipped.
Refer to Convertible Top Boot Cover Installation–If
Equipped, in this section.
CAUTION!
Damage to the convertible top boot cover could result
if the latch handle is not completely closed when the
top is lowered. The convertible top boot cover cannot
be installed while the latch handle is open.
To Raise The Top:
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the convertible top or its components, your vehicle is equipped with a feature that
prevents convertible top operation at speeds over 10
mph (16 km/h).
CAUTION!
To fully insure that no damage occurs, be sure that
the vehicle is at a complete stop with the gear selector
in the Park position (automatic transaxle) or in the
Neutral position (manual transaxle) before lowering
or raising the top.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
1. Remove the convertible top boot cover, if equipped.
Refer to Convertible Top Boot Cover Removal and Storage, in this section.
2. Turn the ignition to the ON position.
3
3. Press the Power Top Switch to raise the top. Before the
top reaches the windshield, open the latch handle and
turn the handle clockwise to open the latches. Press the
switch again to continue raising the top until the two pins
seat themselves in the windshield header.
NOTE: If the top is not latched right away, it may be
necessary to press the power top switch, UP or DOWN
quickly, to align the pins to the windshield header.
4. Pull down on the latch handle and rotate it counterclockwise to engage the latches.
Engaging Convertible Top Latches
5. Raise the latch handle into the stowed position.
128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Car top carriers, ski racks, etc., should not be attached
to the convertible top mechanism as they will damage the top. Do not place objects on the convertible
top, in the top well or on the sport bar. Damage to the
convertible top may occur.
Convertible Top Boot Cover Installation–If
Equipped
1. With the top down and the convertible top latch
handle in the stowed position, lay the unfolded boot
cover across the convertible top.
Convertible Top Latch Handle
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129
2. Install the rear edge of the boot, first tucking the rear
edge of the boot under the rear and both sides of the rails.
3
Boot Laying Across Convertible Top
130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3. Pull the right and left boot arms forward and engage
both boot arm snaps. Make sure both snaps are fully
engaged.
Tucking Boot Under Rail
Engaging Boot Arm Snaps
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131
4. Engage the boot center section retainer using the tabs
provided.
5. Tuck the rear flap of the boot in behind the Upper
Moulding.
3
Engaging Boot Center Section
Tucking In Rear Flap
132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Convertible Top Boot Cover Removal and
Storage
1. Unsnap the snaps and remove the top cover boot.
2. Lay the boot cover flat with the center section retainer
facing the rear of the car.
Boot Removed And Laying Flat
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133
3. First fold the left side of the boot cover to the middle
of the boot cover.
3
Folding Boot Cover Right Side
Folding Boot Cover Left Side
4. Second fold the right side of the boot cover to the
middle, fitting it inside the left side of the boot cover and
store it in the trunk or a dry secure area.
CAUTION!
Do not lay heavy objects on top of the boot or lay the
boot on top of sharp/pointy objects. Damage could
occur to the boot.
134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONVERTIBLE TOP MANUAL OVERRIDE
If your vehicle is experiencing electrical failure (low
battery, etc.) and it is necessary to raise the convertible
top, perform the following steps:
1. Locate the convertible top motor bypass screw, which
is found in the trunk under the convertible top storage
area.
2. Turn the screw counterclockwise until the screw stops.
This will relieve the hydraulic pressure and allow the
convertible top to be raised manually.
Bleeder Screw
3. Using the latch handle raise the top until the two pins
seat themselves in the windshield header.
4. Rotate the latch handle clockwise to open the latches.
5. Pull down and rotate the handle counterclockwise to
engage the latches.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135
6. Raise the handle into the stowed position.
7. Close the convertible top motor bypass screw by
turning the screw clockwise until it stops. Tighten the
screw securely.
NOTE: Failure to tighten the bypass screw securely can
cause convertible top operating concerns.
MIRRORS
Engaging Convertible Top Latches
Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped
Adjust the mirror to center on the view through the rear
window. A two point pivot system allows for horizontal
and vertical mirror adjustment.
3
136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Annoying headlight glare can be reduced by moving the
small control under the mirror to the night position
(toward rear of vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted
while set in the day position (toward windshield).
Outside Mirror—Driver’s Side
Adjust the outside mirror to center on the adjacent lane of
traffic, with a slight overlap of the view obtained on the
inside mirror.
Outside Mirror—Passenger’s Side
Adjust the convex outside mirror so you can just see the
side of your vehicle in the part of the mirror closest to the
vehicle.
WARNING!
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger side mirror could cause you to collide with
another vehicle or other object. Use your inside
mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle
seen in this convex mirror.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137
Electric Remote-Control Mirrors — If Equipped
The power mirror switch is located to the left of the
steering column on the instrument panel. To adjust the
view in the outside mirrors, turn the rotary knob to the L
(Left), O (Center) or R (Right) position. After selecting the
mirror, move the knob in the same direction you want the
mirror to move. Use the O (Center) position to guard
against accidentally moving a mirror position.
3
Power Mirror Switch
138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped
An illuminated vanity mirror is on the sun visor. To use
the mirror, rotate the sun visor down and swing the
mirror cover upward. The lights turn on automatically.
Closing the mirror cover turns off the lights.
NOTE: The driver vanity mirror will become inoperable
when the vehicle alarm is enabled.
NOTE: The passenger vanity mirror will become inoperable if left on for more than 10 minutes.
Sun Visor Sliding Feature
The sun visors may be pulled out to provide extended
coverage of the side glass.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
HANDS–FREE COMMUNICATION (UConnect™) —
IF EQUIPPED
UConnect™ is a voice-activated, hands-free, in- vehicle
communications system. UConnect™ allows you to dial
a phone number with your cellular phone using simple
voice commands (e.g., ⬙Call” ѧ “Mike” ѧ”Work⬙ or ⬙Dial”
ѧ “248-555-1212⬙). Your cellular phone’s audio is transmitted through your vehicle’s audio system; the system
will automatically mute your radio when using the
UConnect™ system.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139
NOTE: The UConnect™ system use requires a cellular
phone equipped with the Bluetooth ⬙Hands-Free Profile,⬙
version 0.96 or higher. See www.chrysler.com/uconnect
for supported phones.
UConnect™ allows you to transfer calls between the
system and your cellular phone as you enter or exit your
vehicle, and enables you to mute the system’s microphone for private conversation.
The UConnect™ phonebook enables you to store up to 32
names and four numbers per name. Each language has a
separate 32-name phonebook accessible only in that
language. This system is driven through your
Bluetooth™ Hands-Free profile cellular phone.
UConnect™ features Bluetooth™ technology - the global
standard that enables different electronic devices to connect to each other without wires or a docking station, so
UConnect works no matter where you stow your cellular
phone (be it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as long as
your phone is turned on and has been paired to the
vehicle’s UConnect™ system. The UConnect™ system
allows up to seven cellular phones to be linked to system.
Only one linked (or paired) cellular phone can be used
with the system at a time. The system is available in
English, Spanish, or French languages (as equipped).
The rearview mirror contains the microphone for the
system and the control buttons that will enable you to
access the system.
UConnect威 Switches
3
140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The UConnect™ system can be used with any HandsFree Profile certified Bluetooth™ cellular phone. See
www.chrysler.com/uconnect for supported phones. If
your cellular phone supports a different profile (e.g.,
Headset Profile), you may not be able to use any
UConnect™ features. Refer to your cellular service provider or the phone manufacturer for details.
Operations
Voice commands can be used to operate the UConnect™
system and to navigate through the UConnect™ menu
structure. Voice commands are required after most
UConnect™ system prompts. You will be prompted for a
specific command and then guided through the available
options.
The UConnect™ system is fully integrated with the
vehicle’s audio system. The volume of the UConnect™
system can be adjusted either from the radio volume
control knob, or from the steering wheel radio control
(right switch), if so equipped.
• Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for
the voice on beep, which follows the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt
or another prompt.
The radio display will be used for visual prompts from
the UConnect™ system such as ⬙CELL⬙ or caller ID on
certain radios.
• For certain operations, compound commands can be
used. For example, instead of saying ⬙Setup⬙ and then
⬙Phone Pairing,⬙ the following compound command
can be said: ⬙Setup Phone Pairing.⬙
• For each feature explanation in this section, only the
combined form of the voice command is given. You
can also break the commands into parts and say each
part of the command, when you are asked for it. For
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141
example, you can use the combined form voice command ⬙Phonebook New Entry,⬙ or you can break the
combined form command into two voice commands:
⬙Phonebook⬙ and ⬙New Entry.⬙ Please remember, the
UConnect™ system works best when you talk in a
normal conversational tone, as if speaking to some one
sitting eight feet away from you.
Voice Command Tree
Refer to “Voice Tree” at the end of this section.
Help Command
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to
know your options at any prompt, say ⬙Help⬙ following
the voice on beep. The UConnect™ system will play all
the options at any prompt if you ask for help.
To activate the UConnect™ system from idle, simply
press the ’Phone’ button and follow audible prompts for
directions. All UConnect™ system sessions begin with a
press of the ’Phone’ button on the mirror.
Cancel Command
At any prompt, after the voice on beep, you can say
⬙Cancel⬙ and you will be returned to the main menu.
However, in a few instances the system will take you
back to the previous menu.
Pair (Link) UConnect™ System to a Cellular Phone
To begin using your UConnect™ system, you must pair
your compatible Bluetooth™ enabled cellular phone.
NOTE: The UConnect™ system use requires a cellular
phone equipped with the Bluetooth ⬙Hands-Free Profile,⬙
version 0.96 or higher. See www.chrysler.com/uconnect
for supported phones.
To complete the pairing process, you will need to reference your cellular phone owner’s manual. One of the
following vehicle specific websites may also provide
detailed instructions for pairing with the brand of phone
that you have:
3
142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• www.chrysler.com/uconnect
• www.dodge.com/uconnect
• www.jeep.com/uconnect
The following are general phone to UConnect™ System
pairing instructions:
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup Phone Pairing⬙ and follow the audible prompts.
• When prompted, after the voice on beep, say ⬙Pair a
Phone⬙ and follow the audible prompts.
• You will be asked to say a four-digit pin number,
which you will later need to enter into your cellular.
You can enter any four-digit pin number. You will not
need to remember this pin number after the initial
pairing process.
• For identification purposes, you will be prompted to
give the UConnect™ system a name for your cellular
phone. Each cellular phone that is paired should be
given a unique phone name.
• You will then be asked to give your cellular phone a
priority level between 1 and 7, 1 being the highest
priority. You can pair up to seven cellular phones to
your UConnect™ system. However, at any given time,
only one cellular phone can be in use, connected to
your UConnect™ System. The priority allows the
UConnect™ system to know which cellular phone to
use if multiple cellular phones are in the vehicle at the
same time. For example, if priority 3 and priority 5
phones are present in the vehicle, the UConnect™
system will use the priority 3 cellular phone when you
make a call. You can select to use a lower priority
cellular phone at any time (refer to ⬙Advanced Phone
Connectivity⬙).
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143
Call/Dial by Saying a Number
Call/Dial by Saying a Name
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• Press the “Phone” button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Dial.⬙
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
“Dial” or Call.⬙
• System will prompt you to say the number you want
call.
• System will prompt you to say the name of the person
you want call.
• For example, you can say “234-567-8901.” The phone
number that you enter must be of valid length and
combination. Based on the Country in which the
vehicle was purchased, the UConnect™ limits the user
from dialing invalid combination of numbers. For
example, in USA, 234-567-890 is nine digits long,
which is not a valid USA phone number - the closest
valid phone number has ten digits.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the person you want to call. For example,
you can say ⬙John Doe,⬙ where John Doe is a previously stored name entry in the UConnect™ phonebook. Refer to ⬙Add Names to Your UConnect™
Phonebook,⬙ to learn how to store a name in the
phonebook.
• The UConnect™ system will confirm the phone number and then dial. The number will appear in the
display of certain radios.
• The UConnect™ system will confirm the name and
then dial the corresponding phone number, which
may appear in the display of certain radios.
3
144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Add Names to Your UConnect™ Phonebook
NOTE: Adding names to phonebook is recommended
when vehicle is not in motion.
• Press the “Phone” button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook New Entry.⬙
• When prompted, say the name of the new entry. Use of
long names helps the voice recognition and is recommended. For example, say ⬙Robert Smith⬙ or ⬙Robert⬙
instead of ⬙Bob.⬙
• When prompted, enter the number designation (e.g.,
⬙Home,⬙ ⬙Work,⬙ ⬙Mobile,⬙ or ⬙Pager⬙). This will allow
you to store multiple numbers for each phonebook
entry, if desired.
• When prompted, recite the phone number for the
phonebook entry that you are adding.
After you are finished adding an entry into the phonebook, you will be given the opportunity to add more
phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the
main menu.
The UConnect™ system will allow you to enter up to 32
names in the phonebook with each name having up to
four associated phone numbers and designations. Each
language has a separate 32-name phonebook accessible
only in that language.
Edit Entries in the UConnect™ Phonebook
NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended
when vehicle is not in motion.
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook Edit.⬙
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145
• You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook
entry that you wish to edit.
• Next, choose the number designation (home, work,
mobile, or pager) that you wish to edit.
• When prompted, recite the new phone number for the
phonebook entry that you are editing.
After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook,
you will be given the opportunities to edit another entry
in the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or
return to the main menu.
⬙Phonebook Edit⬙ can be used to add another phone
number to a name entry that already exists in the
phonebook. For example, the entry John Doe may have a
mobile and a home number, but you can add John Doe’s
work number later using the ⬙Phonebook Edit⬙ feature.
Delete Entries in the UConnect™ Phonebook
NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended
when vehicle is not in motion.
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook Delete.⬙
• After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you will
then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish
to delete. You can either say the name of a phonebook
entry that you wish to delete or you can say ⬙List
Names⬙ to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook
from which you choose. To select one of the entries
from the list, press the ⬙Voice Recognition⬙ button
while the UConnect™ system is playing the desired
entry and say ⬙Delete.⬙
3
146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• After you enter the name, the UConnect™ system will
ask you which designation you wish to delete, home,
work, mobile, or pager. Say the designation you wish
to delete.
• Note that only the phonebook entry in the current
language is deleted.
After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be deleted. Note that only the phonebook in the current
language is deleted.
Delete All Entries in the UConnect™ Phonebook
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook Erase All.⬙
• The UConnect™ system will ask you to verify that you
wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook.
• After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be
deleted.
List All Names in the UConnect™ Phonebook
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook List Names.⬙
• The UConnect™ system will play the names of all the
phonebook entries.
• To call one of the names in the list, press the ⬙Voice
Recognition’ button during the playing of the desired
name, and then say ⬙Call.⬙ NOTE: the user can also
exercise ⬙Edit⬙ or ⬙Delete⬙ operations at this point.
• The UConnect™ system will then prompt you as to
number designation you wish to call.
• The selected number will be dialed.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147
Phone Call Features
The following features can be accessed through the
UConnect™ system if the feature(s) are available on your
cellular service plan. For example, if your cellular service
plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be
accessed through the UConnect™ system. Check with
your cellular service provider for the features that you
have.
Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - No Call
Currently in Progress
When you receive a call on your cellular phone, the
UConnect™ system will interrupt the vehicle audio
system, if on, and will ask if you would like to answer the
call. To reject the call, press and hold the ’Phone’ button
until you hear a single beep indicating that the incoming
call was rejected.
Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - Call
Currently in Progress
If a call is currently in progress and you have another
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
call waiting that you normally hear when using your cell
phone. Press the ’Phone’ button to place the current call
on hold and answer the incoming call.
NOTE: The UConnect™ system compatible phones in
market today do not support rejecting an incoming call
when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can
only either answer an incoming call or ignore it.
Making a Second Call while Current Call in
Progress
To make a second call while you are currently in a call,
press the ’Voice Recognition’ button and say ⬙Dial⬙ or
⬙Call⬙ followed by the phone number or phonebook entry
you wish to call. The first call will be on hold while the
3
148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
second call is in progress. To go back to the first call, refer
to ⬙Toggling Between Calls.⬙ To combine two calls, refer
to ⬙Conference Call.⬙
Place/Retrieve a Call from Hold
To put a call on hold, press the ⬘Phone’ button until you
hear a single beep. This indicates that the call is on hold.
To bring the call back from hold, press and hold the
⬘Phone’ button until you hear a single beep.
Toggling Between Calls
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),
press the ’Phone’ button until you hear a single beep
indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls
have switched. Only one call can be placed on hold at one
time.
Conference Call
When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
hold), press and hold the ’Phone’ button until you hear a
double beep indicating that the two calls have been
joined into one conference call.
Three-Way Calling
To initiate three-way calling, press the ’Voice Recognition’ button while a call is in progress and make a second
phone call as described under ⬙Making a Second Call
while Current Call in Progress.⬙ After the second call has
established, press and hold the ’Phone’ button until you
hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have
been joined into one conference call.
Call Termination
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the ⬘Phone’
button. Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if
there is a call on hold, it will become the new active call.
If the active call is terminated by the far end, a call on
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149
hold may not become active automatically. This is cell
phone dependent. To bring the call back from hold, press
and hold the ‘Phone’ button until you hear a single beep.
Redial
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Redial.⬙
• The UConnect™ system will call the last number that
was dialed on your cellular phone. Note: this may not
be the last number dialed from the UConnect™ system.
Call Continuation
Call continuation is progression of a phone call on
UConnect™ system after the vehicle ignition key has
been switched to off. Call continuation functionality
available on the vehicle can be any one of three types:
• After ignition key is switched off, a call can continue
on the UConnect™ system either until the call ends or
until the vehicle battery condition dictates cessation of
the call on the UConnect™ system and transfer of the
call to the mobile phone.
• After ignition key is switched to off, a call can continue
on the UConnect™ system for certain duration, after
which the call is automatically transferred from the
UConnect™ system to the mobile phone.
• An active call is automatically transferred to the
mobile phone after ignition key is switched to off.
UConnect™ System Features
Language Selection
To change the language that the UConnect™ system is
using,
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
3
150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the language you wish to switch to
(English, Espanol, or Francais, if so equipped).
• Continue to follow the system prompts to complete
language selection.
After selecting one of the languages, all prompts and
voice commands will be in that language.
NOTE: After every UConnect™ language change operation, only the language specific 32-name phonebook is
usable. The paired phone name is not language specific
and usable across all languages.
• Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency
number for your area.
If the phone is not reachable and the UConnect™ system
is operational, you may reach the emergency number as
follows:
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Emergency⬙ and the UConnect™ system will instruct
the paired cellular phone to call the emergency number. This feature is only supported in the USA.
For command translations and alternate commands in
supported languages, refer to “Command Translations”
at the end of this section.
NOTE: The emergency number dialed is based on the
Country where the vehicle is purchased (911 for USA and
Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may not
be applicable with the available cellular service and area.
Emergency Assistance
If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is
reachable:
The UConnect™ system does slightly lower your chances
of successfully making a phone call as compared to that
for the cell phone directly.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151
Your phone must be turned on and paired to the
UConnect™ system to allow use of this vehicle feature in
emergency situations when the cell phone has network
coverage and stays paired to the UConnect™ system.
Towing Assistance
If you need towing assistance,
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Towing Assistance.⬙
NOTE: The Towing Assistance number dialed is based
on the Country where the vehicle is purchased (1-800528-2069 for USA, 1-877-213-4525 for Canada, 55-14-3454
for Mexico city and 1-800-712-3040 for outside Mexico
city in Mexico).
Please refer to the 24-Hour “Towing Assistance” coverage details in the Warranty information booklet and on
the 24–Hour Towing Assistance Card.
Paging
To learn how to page, refer to ⬙Working with Automated
Systems.⬙ Paging works properly except for pagers of
certain companies which time-out a little too soon to
work properly with the UConnect™ system.
Voice Mail Calling
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to ⬙Working
with Automated Systems.⬙
Working with Automated Systems
This method is designed to be used in instances where
one generally has to press numbers on the cellular phone
keypad while navigating through an automated telephone system.
You can use your UConnect™ system to access a voicemail system or an automated service, such as, paging
service or automated customer service. Some services
require immediate response selection, in some instances,
that may be too quick for use of UConnect™ system.
3
152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When calling a number with your UConnect™ system
that normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone
sequence on your cellular phone keypad, you can push
the ’Voice Recognition’ button and say the sequence you
wish to enter followed by the word ⬙Send.⬙ For example,
if required to enter your pin number followed with a
pound 3 7 4 6 #, you can press the ’Voice Recognition’
button and say ⬙3 7 4 6 # Send.⬙ Saying a number, or
sequence of numbers, followed by ⬙Send⬙ is also to be
used to navigate through an automated customer service
center menu structure and to leave a number on a pager.
Turning Confirmation Prompts On/Off
Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system
from confirming your choices (e.g., the UConnect™
system will not repeat a phone number before you dial
it).
Barge In - Overriding Prompts
The ’Voice Recognition’ button can be used when you
wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice
recognition command immediately. For example, if a
prompt is playing ⬙Would you like to pair a phone, clear
aѧ,⬙ you could press the ’Voice Recognition’ button and
say ⬙Pair a Phone⬙ to select that option without having to
listen to the rest of the voice prompt.
Phone and Network Status Indicators
If available on the radio and/or on a premium display
such as the instrument panel cluster, and supported by
your cell phone, the UConnect™ system will provide
notification to inform you of your phone and network
status when you are attempting to make a phone call
using UConnect™. The status is given for roaming network signal strength, phone battery strength, etc.
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup Confirmations.⬙ The UConnect™ system will
play the current confirmation prompt status and you
will be given the choice to change it.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153
Dialing Using the Cellular Phone Keypad
You can dial a phone number with your cellular phone
keypad and still use the UConnect™ system (while
dialing via the cell phone keypad, the user must exercise
caution and take precautionary safety measures). By
dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth™ cellular
phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle’s
audio system. The UConnect™ system will work the
same as if you dial the number using voice recognition.
Mute/Un-mute (Mute off)
When you mute the UConnect™ system, you will still be
able to hear the conversation coming from the other
party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. In
order to mute the UConnect™ system:
NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the
dial ring to the UConnect™ system to play it on the
vehicle audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this
situation, after successfully dialing a number, the user
may feel that the call did not go through even though the
call is in progress. Once your call is answered, you will
hear the audio.
In order to un-mute the UConnect™ system:
• Press the ’Voice Recognition’ button.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Mute.⬙
• Press the ’Voice Recognition’ button.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Mute-off.⬙
3
154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Service
When using AT&T Wireless Service, dialing to phone
number ⬙#121,⬙ you can access voice activated automated
system to receive news, weather, stocks, traffic, etc.
related information.
If you would like to connect or disconnect the
Bluetooth™ connection between a UConnect™ paired
cellular phone and the UConnect™ system, then follow
the instruction described in your cellular phone user’s
manual.
Advanced Phone Connectivity
List Paired Cellular Phone Names
Transfer Call to and from Cellular Phone
The UConnect™ system allows on going calls to be
transferred from your cellular phone to the UConnect™
system without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call from your UConnect™ paired cellular phone to
the UConnect™ system or vice-versa, press the ’Voice
Recognition’ button and say ⬙Transfer Call.⬙
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
Connect or Disconnect Link Between the
UConnect™ System and Cellular Phone
Your cellular phone can be paired with many different
electronic devices, but can only be actively ⬙connected⬙
with one electronic device at a time.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup Phone pairing”.
• When prompted, say ⬙List Phones.⬙
• The UConnect™ system will play the phone names of
all paired cellular phones in order from the highest to
the lowest priority. To “select” or “delete” a paired
phone being announced, press the ⬘Voice recognition’
button and say “Select” or “Delete.” Also, see the next
two sections for an alternate way to “select” or “delete” a paired phone.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155
Select another Cellular Phone
This feature allows you to select and start using another
phone with the UConnect™ system. The phone must
have been previously paired to the UConnect™ system
that you want to use it with.
Delete UConnect™ Paired Cellular Phones
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• At the next prompt, say ⬙Delete⬙ and follow the
prompts.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup Select Phone⬙ and follow the prompts.
• You can also press the ⬘Voice Recognition’ button
anytime while the list is being played, and then choose
the phone that you wish to select.
• The selected phone will be used for the next phone
call. If the selected phone is not available, the
UConnect™ system will return to using the highest
priority phone present in or near (approximately with
in 30 feet) the vehicle.
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup Phone Pairing.⬙
• You can also press the ⬘Voice Recognition’ button
anytime while the list is being played and then choose
the phone you wish to delete.
Things You Should Know About Your UConnect™
System
Voice Training
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recognizing their voice commands or numbers, the UConnect
system Voice Training feature may be used. To enter this
3
156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
training mode, follow one of the two procedures: From
outside the UConnect mode (e.g. from radio mode),
• Press and hold the ‘Voice Recognition’ button for 5
seconds until the session begins, or
• Press the ‘Voice Recognition’ button and say ⬙Setup,
Voice Training⬙ command.
Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the
UConnect System. For best results, the Voice Training
session should be completed when the vehicle is parked,
engine running, all windows closed, and the blower fan
switched off.
Voice Recognition (VR)
• Always wait for the beep before speaking.
• Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would
speak to a person sitting approximately eight (8) feet
away from you.
• Make sure that no one other than you is speaking
during a voice recognition period.
• Performance is maximized under:
• low-to-medium blower setting,
• low-to-medium vehicle speed,
This procedure may be repeated with a new user. The
system will adapt to the last trained voice only.
• low road noise,
To restore the Voice recognition system to factory default
settings, enter the Voice Training session via the above
procedure and follow the prompts.
• fully closed windows,
• smooth road surface,
• dry weather condition.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157
• In a convertible vehicle, the system performance may
be compromised with roof top down.
• You can say ⬙O⬙ (letter ⬙O⬙) for ⬙0⬙ (zero). ⬙800⬙ must be
spoken ⬙eight-zero-zero.⬙
• Even though the system is designed for users speaking
in North American English, French, and Spanish accents, the system may not always work for some.
• Even though international dialing for most number
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing
number combinations may not be supported.
• When navigating through an automated system, such
as voice mail, or when sending a page at the end of
speaking the digit string, make sure to say ⬙send.⬙
Far End Audio Performance
• Storing names in phonebook when vehicle is not in
motion is recommended.
• It is not recommended to store similar sounding
names in the UConnect™ phonebook.
• UConnect™ phonebook nametag recognition rate is
optimized for the voice of the person who stored the
name in the phonebook.
• Audio quality is maximized under:
• low-to-medium blower setting,
• low-to-medium vehicle speed,
• low road noise,
• smooth road surface,
• fully closed windows, and
• dry weather condition.
• Operation from driver seat.
3
158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• In a convertible vehicle, the system performance may
be compromised with roof top down.
• Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness
to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and
not the UConnect™ system.
• Echo at far end can sometime be reduced by lowering
the in-vehicle audio volume.
Bluetooth Communication Link
Occasionally, Cellular phones have been found to lose
connection to the UConnect™ system. When this happens, the connection can generally be re-established by
switching the phone off/on. Your cell phone is recommended to remain in Bluetooth ⬙on⬙ mode.
Power-Up
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either ON
or ACC position, or after a reset, you must wait at least
five (5) seconds prior to using the system.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159
3
160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161
3
162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Primary
Zero
One
Two
Three
Four
Five
Six
Seven
Eight
Nine
Star (*)
Plus (+)
Pound (#)
Add Location
All
North American English
Alternate(s)
Call
Cancel
Confirmation Prompts
Continue
Delete
Dial
Edit
Emergency
English
Erase All
Espanol
Francais
Help
Home
Language
List names
List phones
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163
Mobile
Mute
Mute off
New entry
No
Pager
Pair a phone
Phone pairing
Phonebook
Previous
Record again
Redial
Return to main menu
Select phone
Send
Set up
Towing assistance
Transfer call
Try again
Voice training
Work
Yes
Pairing
Phone book
General Information
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
Return. Main menu
Select
Phone settings / Phone
set up
• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
3
164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
SEATS
FRONT SEAT ADJUSTMENT
The adjusting bar is at the front of the seats, near the
floor. Pull the bar up to move the seat to the desired
position.
Using body pressure, move forward and rearward on the
seat to be sure the seat adjusters have latched.
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat
could cause you to lose control. The seat belt might
not be properly adjusted and you could be injured.
Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt and be seriously or even fatally injured. Use
the recliner only when the vehicle is parked.
Manual Adjustment Bar
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165
POWER SEAT ADJUSTER — IF EQUIPPED
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the seat
belt is no longer resting against your chest. In a
collision you could slide under the seat belt and be
seriously or even fatally injured. Use the recliner
only when the vehicle is parked.
Six-Way Power Seat with Manual Recliner
The seat switch is on the outboard side of the seat near
the floor. Use this switch to move the seat up or down,
forward or rearward, or to tilt the seat.
3
Power Seat Switch
166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
This seat also has a manual recline lever located just to
the rear of the power seat switch. To recline, lean forward
slightly before lifting the lever, then lean back to the
desired position and release the lever. Lean forward and
lift the lever to return the seatback to its normal position.
MANUAL LUMBAR — IF EQUIPPED
The Lumbar adjustment is located on the inboard side of
the driver’s seat. To increase support, rotate the handle
down.
Lumbar Adjust Handle
Recliner Control Lever
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167
FOLDING FRONT PASSENGER SEAT — IF
EQUIPPED
The passenger front seat may be folded fully forward to
provide additional cargo space.
To fold the seat forward pull up on the recliner lever
located on the outboard side of the seat.
Folding Seat Control Lever
DRIVER’S SEAT BACK TILT — IF EQUIPPED
How to operate the driver’s seat:
1. Push the lever down until seat back releases.
2. Push the seat back forward.
3. To return seat to a sitting position, push seat back
rearward.
3
168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The driver’s front seat has a full recliner
memory, which will allow the seat back to return to its
original position.
PASSENGER SEAT BACK TILT (EASY ENTRY
SYSTEM) — CONVERTIBLE
How to operate the passenger front seat:
1. Push the lever down until seat back releases.
2. Push seat back forward until it slides toward the
dashboard.
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt Lever
Passenger Seat Back Tilt Lever
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169
3. To return seat to a sitting position, rotate seat back
upright until it locks.
4. Push seat rearward until the track locks.
NOTE: The passenger front seat has a full recliner
memory, which will allow the seat back to returned to its
original position.
NOTE: The passenger front seat has a track memory,
which returns the seat to just past the half way point of
the track regardless of original position.
ADJUSTABLE HEAD RESTRAINTS
Head restraints can reduce the risk of whiplash injury in
the event of impact from the rear. Pull up or push down
on the head restraints so that the upper edge is as high as
practical. To raise the head restraint, pull up on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push in the button
that is part of the head restraint rod guide, and push
down on the head restraint.
HEATED SEATS — IF EQUIPPED
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even
at low temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time. Do not place anything on the seat
that insulates against heat, such as a blanket or
cushion. This may cause the seat heater to overheat.
3
170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Do not place anything on the seat that insulates
against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This may
cause the seat heater to overheat. To avoid heated seat
surfaces coming in contact and potential seat overheating, ALWAYS ensure that the seat heater is in the
OFF position (amber lights are on for HIGH or LOW
and no amber lights for the OFF position) before
placing any of the seats into a folded flat position.
Heated seats provide comfort and warmth when needed
for the front driver’s and passenger’s seats. The heaters
provide the same average heat level for both seat and
back cushions. The controls for each heater are located
near the bottom center of the instrument panel.
Heated Seat Switches
With the ignition switch in the on or run
position, you may choose from HIGH, LOW, or
OFF heat settings. Amber LEDs on the side of
each switch indicate the level of heat in use.
Two LEDs are illuminated for HIGH, one for LOW, and
none for OFF. Pressing the switch once will select the
HIGH setting. Pressing the switch a second time, will
select the LOW setting. Pressing the switch a third time,
will turn the heating elements OFF.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171
When the HIGH setting is selected, the heater will
provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes
of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the
normal HIGH temperature level. If the HIGH setting is
selected, the system will automatically switch to LOW
after 30 minutes of continuous operation. At that time,
the number of illuminated LEDs changes from two to
one, indicating the change. The LOW setting will turn off
automatically after 30 minutes.
FOLDING REAR SEAT (SEDAN)
To provide additional storage area, each rear seatback can
be folded forward. Push and hold the buttons shown in
the picture to fold down either or both seatbacks.
3
NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.
Folding Rear Seat Button
172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts
• Be sure that everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
NOTE:
• If the rear center lap/shoulder belt appears to be
locked into place, check to verify that the seatback is
fully latched.
• If the seatback is properly latched and the rear center
lap/shoulder belt still does not operate properly check
and see if the Automatic Locking retractor (ALR)
system is activated.
WARNING!
The rear center lap/shoulder belt is equipped with a
lock-out feature to ensure that the seatback is in the
fully upright and locked position when occupied. If
the rear seatback is not fully upright and locked and
the rear center lap/shoulder belt can be pulled out of
the retractor, the vehicle should immediately be
taken to your dealer for service. Failure to follow this
warning could result in serious or fatal injury.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173
FOLDING REAR SEAT (CONVERTIBLE)
To provide additional storage area, each rear seatback can
be folded forward. The seat back release knobs are
located in the trunk area. Pull the left side seatback
release knob to fold down the left side seatback. Pull the
right side seatback release knob to fold down the right
side seatback.
3
Folding Rear Seat Release Knobs
174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure that everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
NOTE: Prior to lifting either seatback to the upright
position, be sure that the seat belt is brought forward to
avoid trapping it behind the seatback.
CAUTION!
Ensure that the seat back is latched with a hard push
to engage the latch, noting the presence of seat back
rubber-overslam bumpers that need to be overcome.
Check that the seat back release knobs are pushed
fully forward in order to allow the latch to engage.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175
TUMBLING REAR SEAT (SEDAN)
To provide additional storage in the cargo area, each rear
seat can be tumbled forward.
• Push and hold the button on the seatback and fold
down the rear seatback.
CAUTION!
3
It is important that the front seats be pulled forward
to the midpoint of the seat track to avoid contact
between the rear seat and the front seatback. If the
front seat is not pulled forward the two seats will
make contact during the tumbling motion and cause
damage to the rear seat material. After the rear seat is
tumbled forward and secured the front seat can then
be repositioned to the preferred position.
Folding Rear Seat Button
176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Pull the release handle located on the outboard side of
the seat. Lift up the seat and tumble the seat forward.
Tumbling Seat Strap
Tumbling Seat Release Strap
• Attach the elastic strap, located at the base of the seat
cushion, onto the hook bar on the center trim panel to
hold the seat in place.
To return the rear seat to it’s upright latched position,
rotate the seat cushion rearward to latch the seat. Then
lift the seatback to its upright latched position.
NOTE: The elastic strap should be reinstalled in the clip
on the base of the seat cushion before returning the seat
to its normal position.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177
TUMBLING REAR SEAT (CONVERTIBLE)
To provide additional storage area, each rear seat can be
tumbled forward.
CAUTION!
To tumble the seat forward use the following procedure:
1. The seat back release knobs are located in the trunk
area. Pull the left side seatback release knob to fold down
the left side seatback. Pull the right side seatback release
knob to fold down the right side seatback.
It is important that the front seats be pulled forward
to the midpoint of the seat track to avoid contact
between the rear seat and the front seatback. If the
front seat is not pulled forward the two seats will
make contact during the tumbling motion and cause
damage to the rear seat material. After the rear seat is
tumbled forward and secured the front seat can then
be repositioned to the preferred position.
Folding Rear Seat Release Knobs
3
178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. From inside the vehicle, fold the rear seat back down
flat.
Tumbling Rear Seat
Folding Rear Seat Back
3. Pull the release strap located at the bottom of the
folded seat back and tumble the seat forward.
4. Attach the cinching tether strap, located at the side of
the seat cushion, onto the hook bar on the center trim
panel and tighten by pulling the cinching strap until the
seat is secure.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179
3
Cinching Tether Strap
To return the tumbling rear seat to the latched (normal)
position use the following procedure:
1. Loosen the strap by pushing rearward on the cinching
tether strap buckle.
Releasing Cinching Tether Strap
2. Disconnect the cinching tether strap.
NOTE: The strap should be reinstalled in the side
pocket on the seat cushion before returning the seat to the
latched (normal) position.
180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Prior to rotating the seat cushions rearward, be
sure that the rear seat belt buckles are secured with the
straps, so that the buckles are accessible.
NOTE: Prior to lifting either seatback to the upright
position, be sure that the seat belt is brought forward to
avoid trapping it behind the seatback.
3. Rotate the seat cushion rearward to latch the seat.
Then lift the seatback to its upright latched position.
CAUTION!
Ensure that the seat back is latched with a hard push
to engage the latch, noting the presence of seat back
rubber-overslam bumpers that need to be overcome.
Check that the seat back release knobs are pushed
fully forward in order to allow the latch to engage.
WARNING!
Rear Seat Belt Buckle Straps
In an accident, you or others in your vehicle could be
injured if seats are not properly latched to their
attachments. Always be sure the seats are fully
latched.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181
REAR SEAT REMOVAL (SEDAN)
The rear seats can be removed to provide more cargo
space.
• Pull the release lever located on the outboard side of
the seat. Lift up the seat and tumble the seat forward.
• Push and hold the button on the seatback and fold
down the rear seatback.
3
Tumbling Seat Release Strap
Folding Rear Seat Button
182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Lift up the release levers to disengage the seat from the
floor attachments.
NOTE: Small rollers on the bottom of the folded seat
and a handle at the top allow the seat to be easily moved
when removed from the vehicle.
To reinstall the rear seat, insert the seat into the floor
attachments. Lower the release levers of the seat to latch
the front floor attachments and rotate the seat rearward
to latch the seat. Lift the seat back to its upright latched
position.
WARNING!
Release Lever Location
• Using the handle on the seat, the seat assembly can
now be lifted and removed from the vehicle.
In an accident, you or others in your vehicle could be
injured if seats are not properly latched to their floor
attachments. Always be sure the seats are fully
latched.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
To open the hood, two latches must be released. First pull
the primary hood release lever located under the left side
of the instrument panel.
Then move the secondary hood latch (safety latch) located under the front edge of the hood, slightly to the
right of center, and raise the hood.
3
Secondary Hood Latch
Primary Hood Release Lever
184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Use the hood prop rod clipped to the driver’s side of the
engine compartment to secure the hood in the open
position. Place the hood prop at the location stamped into
the inner hood surface.
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Lower the hood until it is open approximately 20
cm (8 inches) and then drop it. This should secure both
latches. Never drive your vehicle unless the hood is fully
closed, with both latches engaged.
WARNING!
If the hood is not fully latched it could fly up when
the vehicle is moving and block your forward vision.
You could have a collision. Be sure all hood latches
are fully latched before driving.
LIGHTS
Map/Reading Lights (Sedan)
These lights are mounted between the sun visors above the
rear view mirror. Each light is turned ON by pressing the
button. Press the button a second time to turn the light OFF.
The lights also come on when a door is opened or the dimmer
control is turned fully upward, past the second detent.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185
NOTE: The lights will remain on until the switch is
pressed a second time, so be sure they have been turned
off before leaving the vehicle. They will not turn off
automatically.
Map/Reading Lights (Convertible)
When the ignition switch is in the ON position, these
lights, located under the rearview mirror can be turned
on by switches located at the base of the rearview mirror.
3
NOTE: The lights will remain on until the switch is
pressed a second time, so be sure they have been turned
off before leaving the vehicle. They will not turn off
automatically.
186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Multi-Function Control Lever
The Multi-Function Control Lever controls the operation
of the headlights, parking lights, turn signals, headlight
beam selection, instrument panel light dimming, interior
lights, the passing lights, and fog lights. The lever is
located on the left side of the steering column.
Headlights, Parking Lights, Instrument Panel
Lights
Turn the end of the Multi-Function Control Lever to the
first detent for parking light operation. Turn to the
second detent for headlight operation.
Headlamp Control
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187
To change the brightness of the instrument panel lights,
rotate the center portion of the Multi-Function Control
Lever up or down.
Daytime Running Lights (DRL) — If Equipped
The high beam lights will come on as Daytime Running
Lights (DRL) at DRL intensity (lower), whenever the
ignition is on, the engine is running, the headlight switch
is off, the parking brake is off, the turn signal is off, and
the gear shift is in any position except park.
NOTE: On this vehicle, the daytime running light will
automatically turn off when the turn signal is in operation and automatically turn back on when the turn signal
is not operating.
Lights-on Reminder
If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition
is turned OFF, a chime will sound to alert the driver
when the driver’s door is opened.
Dimmer Control
3
188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Fog Lights — If Equipped
NOTE: The fog lights will only operate with the headlights on low beam. Selecting high beam headlights will
turn off the fog lights.
Turn Signals
Fog Lamp Control
The front fog light switch is on the Multi-Function
Control Lever. To activate the front fog lights, turn
on the parking lights or the low beam headlights and pull
out the end of the control lever.
Turn Signal Control
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189
Move the Multi-Function Control Lever up or down and
the arrows on each side of the instrument cluster flash to
show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal
lights. You can signal a lane change by moving the lever
partially up or down without moving beyond the detent.
Highbeam/Lowbeam Select Switch
3
If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is a
very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light
bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the fuse or indicator bulb is
defective.
Highbeam, Lowbeam, and Passing Lights
Push the Multi-Function Control Lever away from you to
switch the headlights to HIGH beam. Pull the Lever
toward you to switch the headlights back to Low beam.
190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Passing Light
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the Multi-Function Control Lever toward
you. This will cause the headlights to turn on at high
beam and remain on until the lever is released.
NOTE: If the Multi-Function Control Lever is held in
the flash to pass position for more than 15 seconds, the
high beams will shut off. If this occurs, wait 30 seconds
for the next flash to pass operation.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The wipers and washers are operated by a switch
on the control lever. The lever is located on the
right side of the steering column. Rotate the
control to select the desired wiper speed.
Wiper/Washer Switch
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191
Windshield Washers
To use the washer, pull the control lever toward you and
hold while spray is desired. If the lever is pulled while in
the delay range, the wiper will operate in low speed for
two wipe cycles after the lever is released, and then
resume the intermittent interval previously selected.
Mist Feature
3
If the lever is pulled while in the OFF position, the wipers
will operate for two wipe cycles, then turn OFF.
Mist Control
Push down on the wiper control lever to activate a single
wipe to clear the windshield of road mist or spray from
a passing vehicle. As long as the lever is held down, the
wipers will continue to operate.
192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
In cold weather, always turn off the wiper switch and
allow the wipers to return to the park position before
turning off the engine. If the wiper switch is left on
and the wipers freeze to the windshield, damage to
the wiper motor may occur when the vehicle is
restarted.
Windshield Wiper Operation
Rotate the control to the second detent for Low speed
wiper operation, or to the third detent for High speed
operation
Intermittent Wiper System
The intermittent feature of this system was designed for
use when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle,
with a variable pause between cycles, desirable. For
maximum delay between cycles, rotate the control knob
into the upper end of the delay range.
The delay interval decreases as you rotate the knob until
it enters the LO continual speed position.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to an accident. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with defroster before and during windshield washer use.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193
NOTE: If the front wiper is operating when the ignition
is turned off, the wiper will automatically return to the
⬙Park⬙ position. When the vehicle is restarted, the wipers
will resume operation.
3
TILT STEERING COLUMN
To tilt the column, push down on the lever below the
multifunction control lever and move the steering wheel
up or down, as desired. Pull the lever back up to lock the
column firmly in place.
Tilt Steering Column Control
194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Tilting the steering column while the vehicle is
moving is dangerous. Without a stable steering column, you could lose control of the vehicle and have
an accident. Adjust the column only while the vehicle is stopped. Be sure it is locked before driving.
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, this device takes over the accelerator
operation at approximately either 30 mph (40 km/h ) or
35 mph (56 km/h) depending on the model or engine
size. The speed control lever is located on the right side of
the steering wheel.
PT 7 Speed Control Ballon L or R
To Activate:
Push the ON/OFF button. The CRUISE indicator in the
instrument cluster will illuminate. To turn the system
OFF, push the ON/OFF button a second time. The
CRUISE indicator will turn off. The system should be
turned OFF when not in use.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system OFF when you are not using it.
To Set At A Desired Speed:
When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, press
down on the lever and release. Release the accelerator
and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed.
NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady
speed and on level ground before pressing the SET lever.
While in the AutoStick mode, speed control will only
operate in third and fourth gear.
To Deactivate:
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pulling the speed control
lever towards you CANCEL, or normal brake or clutch
pressure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate speed
control without erasing the set speed memory. Pressing
the ON/OFF button or turning off the ignition switch
erases the set speed memory.
To Resume Speed:
To resume a previously set speed, push the RESUME
ACCEL lever up and release. Resume can be used at any
speed above 20 mph (32 km/h).
To Vary The Speed Setting:
When the speed control is ON, speed can be increased by
pushing up and holding RESUME ACCEL. Release the
lever when the desired speed is reached, and the new
speed will be set.
3
196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Tapping RESUME ACCEL once will result in a 2 mph (3
km/h) speed increase. Each time the lever is tapped,
speed increases so that tapping the lever three times will
increase speed by 6 mph (10 km/h), etc.
To decrease speed while speed control is ON, push down
and hold SET DECEL. Release the lever when the desired
speed is reached, and the new speed will be set.
Tapping the SET DECELbutton once will result in a 1
mph (2 km/h) speed decrease. Each time the button is
tapped, speed decreases.
Manual Transaxle:
Depressing the clutch pedal will disengage the speed
control. A slight increase in engine RPM before the speed
control disengages is normal.
Vehicles equipped with manual transaxles may need to
be shifted into a lower gear to climb hills without speed
loss.
WARNING!
Speed Control can be dangerous where the system
can’t maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could
go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose
control. An accident could be the result. Don’t use
Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are
winding, icy, snow-covered, or slippery.
To Accelerate For Passing:
Depress the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
Using Speed Control On Hills
NOTE: The speed control system maintains speed up
and down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills
is normal.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197
Vehicles equipped with four speed automatic transaxles
may experience a downshift to third gear while climbing
uphill or descending downhill. This downshift to third
gear is necessary to maintain vehicle set speed.
On steep hills a greater speed loss or gain may occur so
it may be preferable to drive without speed control.
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink威 replaces up to three remote controls (handheld transmitters) that operate devices such as garage
door openers, motorized gates, lighting, or home security
systems. The HomeLink威 unit operates off your vehicle’s
battery.
The HomeLink威 buttons that are located in the headliner
or sun visor designate the three different HomeLink威
channels.
3
HomeLink威 Buttons
NOTE: HomeLink威 is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
WARNING!
Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are training the Universal Transceiver. Do
not train the transceiver if people or pets are in the
path of the door or gate. Only use this transceiver
with a garage door opener that has a “stop and
reverse” feature as required by Federal safety standards. This includes most garage door opener models
manufactured after 1982. Do not use a garage door
opener without these safety features. Call toll-free
1–800–355–3515
or,
on
the
Internet
at
www.HomeLink.com for safety information or
assistance.
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage while
training the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death.
PROGRAMMING HOMELINK姞
Before You Begin
If you have not trained any of the HomeLink威 buttons,
erase all channels before you begin training.
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for 20
seconds until the red indicator flashes.
It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the
hand-held transmitter of the device being programmed
to HomeLink威 for more efficient training and accurate
transmission of the radio-frequency signal.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199
Your vehicle should be parked outside of the garage
when programming.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Hold the battery side of the hand-held transmitter
away from the HomeLink威 button you wish to program.
Place the hand-held transmitter 1–3 in (3-8 cm) away
from the HomeLink威 button you wish to program while
keeping the indicator light in view.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the chosen
HomeLink威 button and the hand-held transmitter button
until the HomeLink威 indicator changes from a slow to a
rapidly blinking light, then release both the HomeLink威
and hand-held transmitter buttons.
Watch for the HomeLink威 indicator to change flash rates.
When it changes, it is programmed. It may take up to 30
seconds, or longer in rare cases. The garage door may
open and close while you train.
NOTE:
• Some gate operators and garage door openers may
require you to replace Step 3 with procedures noted in
the “Gate Operator/Canadian Programming” section.
• After training a HomeLink威 channel, if the garage
door does not operate with HomeLink威 and the garage door opener was manufactured after 1995, the
garage door opener may have a rolling code. If so,
proceed to the heading “Programming A Rolling Code
System.”
4. Press and hold the just-trained HomeLink威 button
and observe the indicator light.
If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is
complete and the garage door (or device) should activate
when the HomeLink威 button is pressed.
3
200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds, and
then turns to a constant light, continue with programming for a Rolling Code.
5. PROGRAMMING A ROLLING CODE SYSTEM
At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), locate
the “Learn” or “Training” button.
This can usually be found where the hanging antenna
wire is attached to the garage door opener motor (it is
NOT the button normally used to open and close the
door).
Training The Garage Door Opener
1 — Door Opener
2 — Training Button
6. Firmly press and release the “Learn” or “Training”
button. The name and color of the button may vary by
manufacturer.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201
NOTE: There are 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
step after the “Learn” button has been pressed.
7. Return to the vehicle and press the programmed
HomeLink威 button twice (holding the button for two
seconds each time). If the device is plugged in and
activates, programming is complete.
If the device does not activate, press the button a third
time (for two seconds) to complete the training.
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
To program the remaining two HomeLink威 buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
GATE OPERATOR/CANADIAN PROGRAMMING
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit) after several seconds of
transmission – which may not be long enough for
HomeLink威 to pick up the signal during programming.
Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are
designed to “time-out” in the same manner.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
door or gate motor.
If you are having difficulties programming a garage door
opener or a gate operator, replace “Programming
HomeLink威” Step 3 with the following:
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink威 button
while you press and release - every two seconds
(“cycle”) your hand-held transmitter until HomeLink威
3
202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
has successfully accepted the frequency signal. The
indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when
fully trained.
If you unplugged the device for training, plug it back in
at this time.
Then proceed with Step 4 under “Programming
HomeLink威” earlier in this section.
USING HOMELINK姞
To operate, simply press and release the programmed
HomeLink威 button. Activation will now occur for the
trained device (i.e., garage door opener, gate operator,
Security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting,
etc. The hand-held transmitter of the device may also be
used at any time.
REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE HOMELINK姞
BUTTON
To re-program a channel that has been previously
trained, follow these steps:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink威 button until
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with Programming Homelink威 Step 2 and follow all remaining steps.
SECURITY
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
in your vehicle.
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for 20
seconds until the red indicator flashes. Note that all
channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be
erased.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203
The HomeLink威 Universal Transceiver is disabled when
the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
TROUBLESHOOTING TIPS
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink威, here
are some of the most common solutions:
• Replace the battery in the original transmitter.
• Press the “Learn” button on the Garage Door Opener
to complete the training for a Rolling Code.
• Did you unplug the device for training, and remember
to plug it back in?
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
GENERAL INFORMATION
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired
operation
NOTE: The transmitter has been tested and it complies
with FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
The term IC before the certification/registration number
only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.
3
204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
POWER SUNROOF (SEDAN ONLY) — IF
EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switch is located in the reading lamp.
Turn the Ignition Key to the ACC or ON position, press
and hold the switch rearward to fully open the sunroof.
The sunroof can be stopped at any position between
closed and full open. Momentarily pressing the switch
rearward will activate the Express Open Feature, causing
the sunroof to open automatically.
Press and hold the button in the center of the sunroof
switch to open the vent. The sunroof can be stopped at
any position between closed and full vent. To close the
sunroof from the vent position, press and hold the switch
forward. Releasing the switch will stop the movement of
the sunroof and the sunroof will remain in the partial
vent position until the switch is pushed forward again.
Power Sunroof Switch
Express Open Feature
During the Express Open operation, any movement of
the switch will stop the sunroof and it will remain in a
partial open position. Again, momentarily pressing the
switch rearward will activate the Express Open Feature.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205
To close the sunroof, hold the switch in the forward
position. Again, any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partial open
condition until the switch is pushed forward again.
The sunshade can be opened manually. It will also open
as the sunroof opens. The sunshade cannot be closed if
the sunroof is open.
WARNING!
Never leave children in a vehicle, with the keys in
the ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the power
sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch.
Such entrapment may result in serious injury or
death.
WARNING!
In an accident, there is a greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could also
be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten your
seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are
properly secured too.
Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow fingers or other body parts, or any object
to project through the sunroof opening. Injury may
result.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
3
206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
the glass panel.
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
The outlets include tethered caps, labeled with a key
symbol or battery symbol, indicating power source. All
outlets are protected by a single 20–Amp fuse.
The standard outlet in the front of the center floor console
is a conventional cigar lighter outlet.
Front Power Outlet
It will accept a cigar lighter unit, which is part of the
optional Smokers Package. To preserve the heating element of the cigar lighter unit, do not hold the lighter in
the heating position. As a child safety precaution, this
outlet is powered by the ignition switch, only when the
switch is in the ON or ACC positions.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 207
There is one optional power outlet located in the right
rear cargo area.
The Rear Power Outlet is powered directly by the battery.
As an option, fuse #11 in the Integrated Power Module
(IPM), may be repositioned to allow power to come from
the ignition switch only when in the ON or ACC positions.
NOTE: The Rear Power Outlet will not accept a cigar
lighter unit as it is intended only for accessory items.
Rear Power Outlet
3
208 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off
CAUTION!
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent engine starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will degrade the
battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
CONSOLE FEATURES
The console has two front cup holders, a removable coin
holder, 12 volt power outlet and a front storage tray.
There are three additional cup holders; one is molded in
the center of the console to hold large cups and the others
are in the rear of the console to serve passengers in the
rear seat. The floor console power outlet will also operate
a conventional cigar lighter unit (if equipped with an
optional Smoker’s Package).
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 209
CAUTION!
• Many accessories that can be plugged into the 12
volt power outlet, draw power from the vehicle’s
battery, even when not in use; i.e. cellular phones,
etc. Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the
vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or prevent engine starting.
STORAGE
Center Console/Armrest Storage Bin
3
• Accessories that draw higher power such as coolers, vacuum cleaners, lights, etc., will discharge the
battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started, (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
Sliding Armrest
210 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The center console provides a sliding armrest with two
unique storage compartments under the lid.
Push the upper button on the front of the armrest to raise
the upper cover. Inside is an area to store a cell phone and
other miscellaneous items. Push the lower button on the
front of the armrest, and raise the armrest for access to
the lower storage bin. The lower storage area can be used
for storing up to six CD’s and other miscellaneous items.
Storage Pockets
There are also Storage pockets located on each door trim
panel.
REAR SHELF PANEL— IF EQUIPPED
The rear shelf panel attaches to guides in the rear cargo
area. The rear shelf panel may be installed in one of five
different positions.
Sliding Armrest Storage Bins
NOTE: The liftgate may be opened or closed with the
rear cargo shelf panel in position 1, position 2, position 3
or position 4.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 211
WARNING!
• To avoid tipping, lock the shelf securely in all
positions.
• Do not drive this vehicle with the liftgate open, or
use the shelf as a seat.
3
• Failure to follow these warnings could result in
serious or fatal injury.
Position 1 (Top)
Insert the front outboard corners of the shelf panel into
the top guides and slide forward. Press down on the back
of the shelf panel to lock it into place.
Rear Shelf Panel Position 1
WARNING!
Do not load objects on the shelf in position 1 (top). In
an accident objects could strike occupants causing
serious or fatal injury.
212 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Position 2 (Middle)
Insert the front outboard corners of the shelf panel into
the middle guides and slide forward. Press down on the
back of the shelf panel to lock it into place.
WARNING!
Do not load objects over 100 lbs (45 kg) in position 2
(middle). Failure to follow this warning could cause
the shelf to collapse resulting in personal injury.
Position 3 (Floor)
Insert the front outboard corners of the shelf panel into
the bottom guides and slide forward.
NOTE: To carry items that may soil the carpeting, the
rear shelf panel may be inverted in position 2 or position
3.
Rear Shelf Panel Position 2
Position 4 (Vertical)
Insert the front outboard corners of the shelf panel into
the vertical guides behind the rear seatbacks near the
floor and slide downward. Push the shelf panel forward
to lock it into place.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 213
WARNING!
When in the vertical position, the rear shelf panel
should not be used as a barrier for large objects in the
cargo area when the seatbacks folded down. In an
accident objects could strike the seatbacks or occupants causing serious or fatal injury.
Rear Shelf Panel Position 4
Position 5 (table)
With the liftgate open the rear shelf panel can be moved
rearward to act as a serving counter.
1. Install the front corners of the shelf panel into the top
rear guides. Press down on the shelf panel to lock it into
place.
3
214 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Twist the knob on the underside of the panel and
lower the shelf leg.
Rear Shelf Panel Position 5
Rear Shelf Leg Release Knob
3. Install the shelf leg into the liftgate latch area as
labeled on the rear scuff plate.
WARNING!
Do not load objects over 100 lbs (45 kg) in position 5
(table). Failure to follow this warning could cause the
shelf to collapse resulting in personal injury.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 215
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED
The crossbars and siderails are designed to carry the
weight on vehicles equipped with a luggage rack. The
load must not exceed 150 lbs (68 kg), and should be
uniformly distributed over the luggage rack crossbars.
To adjust the crossbars with bottom-style releases (if
equipped), depress the button and slide the crossbar to
the next locking position. Alternate sides until the crossbars are positioned correctly for your cargo and the
stanchions are locked square to the slide rails.
Use both adjustable crossbars assemblies to support the
load and distribute the load as evenly as possible.
External racks do not increase the total load carrying
capacity of the vehicle. Be sure that the total occupant
and luggage load inside the vehicle, plus the load on the
luggage rack, do not exceed the rated vehicle capacity.
To adjust the crossbars with latch-style releases (if
equipped), release the latches on the inboard side of the
crossbar supports on each side of the vehicle, then move
the crossbars to the desired position. Once the crossbar is
in the desired position, return both latches to the locked
position.
NOTE: When the luggage rack is not in use, place the
crossbars together at the rear of the vehicle. In this
position they are designed to improve the vehicle aerodynamics and reduce wind noise.
3
216 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
WARNING!
To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do not
exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity of 150
lbs (68 kg). Always distribute heavy loads as evenly
as possible and secure the load appropriately.
Cargo must be securely tied before driving your
vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the
vehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting in personal injury or property damage. Follow the roof rack
“Cautions” when carrying cargo on your roof rack.
Long loads which extend over the windshield, such
as wood panels or surfboards, should be secured to
both the front and rear of the vehicle.
Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully
when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof rack.
Wind forces, due to natural causes or nearby truck
traffic, can add sudden upward loads. This is especially true on large flat loads and may result in
damage to the cargo or your vehicle.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 217
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
Electric Rear Window Defroster
NOTE: The defroster turns off automatically after 10
minutes of operation. Each following activation of the
defroster will last for five minutes.
CAUTION!
Rear Defroster Switch
The push-button is located at the center of the
instrument panel, below the radio. Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster, and the
optional electric remote control heated mirrors. An amber
light shows that the defroster is on.
To avoid damaging the electrical conductors, do not
use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive window
cleaners on the interior surface of the rear window.
Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm
water.
Rear Wiper/Washer Switch (Sedan Models Only)
— If Equipped
A switch on the right side of the steering column controls
operation of the rear wiper/washer function. Rotating
the center of the switch forward to the ON position will
activate the wiper. Rotating the center of the switch all
the way forward will turn on the wash function. The
3
218 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
wash pump will continue to operate as long as the button
is pressed. Upon release, the wipers will cycle two times
before returning to the set position.
If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned
OFF, the wiper will automatically return to the “Park”
position if power accessory delay is active. Power accessory delay can be cancelled by opening the door, if this
happens the rear wiper will stop at its current position
and will not go to park.
Adding Washer Fluid
The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the
rear window washer (if equipped) is shared. It is located
in the rear of the engine compartment on the passenger
side and should be checked for fluid level at regular
intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and operate the system for
a few seconds to flush out the residual water.
06 Rear Wiper Switch
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 Instrument Panel Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
▫ Odometer Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
䡵 Instrument Cluster—Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
▫ Trip Odometer (ODO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
䡵 Instrument Cluster—Premium . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
䡵 Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) – If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
䡵 Instrument Cluster—Turbo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
䡵 Instrument Cluster Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
䡵 Compass Mini Trip Computer (CMTC) — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
▫ EVIC Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
▫ Compass/Temperature/Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
▫ Average Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
▫ Compass Mini Trip Computer Reset Button . . . 235
▫ Distance To Empty (DTE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
▫ Compass/Temperature Display . . . . . . . . . . . 236
▫ Elapsed Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
4
220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
▫ Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
▫ Operating Instructions - CD Mode . . . . . . . . . 255
▫ Personal Settings (Customer Programmable
Features) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
▫ Operating Instructions - Auxiliary Mode . . . . . 257
䡵 Setting The Analog Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
䡵 Radio General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
▫ Radio Broadcast Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
▫ Two Types Of Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
▫ Electrical Disturbances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
▫ AM Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
▫ FM Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
䡵 Sales Code REF — AM/FM/CD (Single Disc)
Radio With Optional Satellite Radio And Hands
Free Phone Capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
▫ Operating Instructions - Radio Mode . . . . . . . 252
▫ Operating Instructions - Hands-Free Phone —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
▫ Operating Instructions - Satellite Radio — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
䡵 Sales Code RAQ – AM/FM/CD (6-Disc) Radio
With Optional Satellite Radio, Hands-Free Phone,
And Video Entertainment Systems (VES™)
Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
▫ Operating Instructions - Radio Mode . . . . . . . 259
▫ Operating Instructions - (CD Mode For CD
Audio Play) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
▫ Load/Eject Button (CD Mode For CD Audio
Play) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 221
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
▫ Operating Instructions - (CD Mode For MP3
Audio Play) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
▫ Using The PTY (Program Type) Button (If
Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
▫ PTY Button ⬙Scan⬙ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
▫ Load/Eject Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) . . 271
▫ PTY Button ⬙Seek⬙ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
䡵 Satellite Radio — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
▫ Satellite Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
▫ System Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
▫ Reception Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
▫ Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
䡵 CD/DVD Disc Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
▫ Selecting Satellite Mode In REF, And RAQ,
Radios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
▫ Selecting a Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
▫ Storing And Selecting Pre-Set Channels . . . . . . 275
䡵 Radio Operation And Cellular Phones . . . . . . . . 277
䡵 Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
▫ Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
4
222 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
1 - Air Vent
2 - Instrument Cluster
3 - Power Windows
4 - Analog Clock
* If Equipped
5
6
7
8
- Radio
- Assist Handle
- Glove Compartment
- Heated Seats*
9 - TRAC Off
10 - Climate Controls
11 - Storage Cubby
12 - Pass Airbag Off
13
14
15
16
-
Hazard Lights
Rear Window Defroster*
Power Convertible Top
Side Mirror Control*
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 223
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER—BASE
4
224 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER—PREMIUM
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 225
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER—TURBO
4
226 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
1. Fuel Gauge
When the ignition switch is in the ON position, the
pointer will show the level of fuel remaining in the
fuel tank.
2. Fuel Door Reminder
This is a reminder that the Fuel Filler Door is located on
the front passenger’s (right) side of the vehicle.
3. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperature. Any reading below the red area of the
gauge shows that the engine cooling system is
operating properly. The gauge pointer may show a
higher than normal temperature when driving in hot
weather, up mountain grades, in heavy stop and go
traffic, or when towing a trailer.
If the pointer rises to the H (red) mark, the instrument
cluster will sound a chime. Pull over and stop the vehicle.
Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until
the pointer drops back into the normal range. If the
pointer remains on the H (red) mark, turn the engine off
immediately and call for service.
There are steps that you can take to slow down an
impending overheat condition. If your air conditioning is
on, turn it off. The air conditioning system adds heat to
the engine cooling system and turning off the A/C
removes this heat. You can also turn the Temperature
control to maximum heat, the Mode control to Floor and
the Fan control to High. This allows the heater core to act
as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
from the engine cooling system.
4. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 227
5. Tachometer
The white area of the scale shows the permissible engine
revolutions-per-minute (rpm x 1000) for each gear range.
Before reaching the red area, ease up on the accelerator to
prevent engine damage.
6. Transmission Range Indicator
This display indicator shows the automatic transmission
gear selection.
7. Tire Pressure Monitor Light
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle
has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those
tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
NOTE: Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if underinflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination
of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
4
228 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to
continue to function properly.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Do not use aftermarket tire sealants
or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
(Refer to “Tire Inflation Pressures” under “Tires — General Information” and to “Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS)” in Section 5 of this manual for more information).
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 229
8. Odometer/Trip Odometer
A vacuum fluorescent display indicates the total distance
the vehicle has been driven. Also, the cluster will display,
replacing the odometer/trip odometer, vehicle warning
messages such as: door/deck/hatch/gate ajar and loose
gas cap. Loose gas cap will be displayed from the
Odometer/Trip Odometer on all models.
NOTE: If vehicle is equipped with the optional Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) in the instrument cluster, all warnings including “door”, “dECK”,
“hATCh”, and “gATE” will only be displayed in the
EVIC display. For additional information, refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center — If Equipped” in
Section 3.
U.S. federal regulations require that upon transfer of
vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the
correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. Therefore, if the odometer reading is changed during repair or
replacement, be sure to keep a record of the reading
before and after the service so that the correct mileage can
be determined.
9. Cruise Indicator — If Equipped
This indicator shows that the Speed Control
System is ON.
NOTE: The word “SET” will not illuminate when the
Speed Control System is on.
10. Malfunction Indicator Light
This light is part of an onboard diagnostic system
called OBD that monitors emissions, engine, and
automatic transmission control systems. The light
will illuminate when the key is in the ON/RUN position
before engine start. If the bulb does not come on when
turning the key from OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.
4
230 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap,
poor fuel quality, etc. may illuminate the light after
engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light
stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. In
most situations the vehicle will drive normally and will
not require towing.
If the Malfunction Indicator Light flashes when the
engine is running, serious conditions may exist that
could lead to immediate loss of power or severe catalytic
converter damage. The vehicle should be serviced as
soon as possible if this occurs.
11. Odometer/Trip Odometer Reset Knob
Press this button to change the display from odometer to
either of the two trip odometer settings. Trip A or Trip B
will appear when in the trip odometer mode. Push in and
hold the button for two seconds to reset the trip odometer
to 0 miles or kilometers. The odometer must be in trip
mode to reset.
12. Charging System Light
This light shows the status of the electrical charging system. The light should come on briefly when
the ignition switch is first turned ON and remain on
briefly as a bulb check. If the light stays on or comes on
while driving, it means that there is a problem with the
charging system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY.
13. Turn Signal Indicators
The arrows will flash in unison with the exterior
turn signal, when using the turn signal lever.
NOTE: Turn signal bulbs are located in the Instrument
Panel.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 231
14. Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator
Light/Traction Control System (TCS) Indicator Light —
If Equipped
If this indicator light flashes during acceleration, apply as little throttle as possible. While
driving, ease up on the accelerator. Adapt your
speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions, and do not switch off the ESP, or TCS — if
equipped.
15. Brake System Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions,
including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on, it may
indicate that the parking brake is applied, there
is a low brake fluid level or there is a problem with the
anti-lock brake system.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. Failure of either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers which change fluid level conditions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.
4
232 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the brake light on is dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It will
take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have an
accident. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with Anti-Lock brakes (ABS), are also
equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD).
In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning Light
will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate repair
to the ABS system is required.
The operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked
by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to
the ON position. The light should illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light should then turn off unless
the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected.
If the light does not illuminate, have the light inspected
by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON position.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
16. Seat Belt Reminder Light
When the ignition switch is first turned ON, this
light will come on for about six seconds. A chime
will sound if you have not pulled the shoulder belt
out of the retractor. This is a reminder to “buckle up”. If
you do not buckle up, the light will remain on.
17. Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condition. If the engine is critically hot, a warning chime
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 233
will sound 10 times. After the chime turns off, the engine
will still be critically hot until the light goes out.
light will come on when the ignition key is turned to the
ON position and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
18. Low Fuel Light
When the fuel level drops to 2 gallons, the fuel
symbol will light and a single chime will sound.
If the ABS light remains on or comes on during driving,
it indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system
is not functioning and that service is required, however,
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
normally provided that the BRAKE warning light is not
on.
19. Theft Alarm Light — If Equipped
This light will flash rapidly for several seconds when the
alarm system is arming. The light will begin to flash
slowly indicating that the system is armed.
20. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
This light shows when the front fog lights are ON.
21. Anti-Lock Warning Light (ABS) — If Equipped
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) described elsewhere in this manual. This
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
as soon as possible to restore the benefit of Anti-Lock
Brakes.
The warning light should be checked frequently to assure
that it is operating properly. Turn the ignition key to the
on position, but do not start the vehicle. The light should
come on. If the light does not come on, have the system
checked by an authorized dealer.
4
234 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
22. Oil Pressure Light
Shows low engine oil pressure. The light will come
on and remain on when the ignition switch is
turned from the OFF to the ON position, and the light
will turn off after the engine is started. If the bulb does
not come on during starting, have the system checked by
an authorized dealer.
If the light comes on and remains on while driving, stop
the vehicle and shut off the engine. DO NOT OPERATE
THE VEHICLE UNTIL THE CAUSE IS CORRECTED.
The light does not show the quantity of oil in the engine.
This can be determined using the procedure shown in
Section 7.
23. Airbag Light
The light comes on and remains on for 6 to 8
seconds as a bulb check when the ignition
switch is first turned ON. If the light does not
come on during starting, stays on, or comes on while
driving, have the system checked by an authorized
dealer.
24. High Beam Indicator
This light shows that the headlights are on high
beam. Pull the turn signal lever toward the steering wheel to switch the headlights from high or low
beam.
25. Compass Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC) or Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Button—If Equipped
Pushing this button will switch between the different
EVIC functions.
Press the CMTC reset button to scroll through sub menus
(i.e. Trip Functions: AVG. Fuel Economy, DTE, Elapsed
Time, and Units.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 235
26. Compass Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC) or Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Display — If
Equipped
On vehicles equipped with Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), when the appropriate conditions
exist, this display shows the EVIC messages. Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center” later in this
section.
On vehicles equipped with Compass Mini Trip Computer
(CMTC) the display provides the outside temperature,
one of eight compass headings to indicate the direction
the vehicle is facing and the current radio station. Refer to
“Compass Mini Trip Computer” later in this section.
COMPASS MINI TRIP COMPUTER (CMTC) — IF
EQUIPPED
NOTE: The compass on your vehicle is self-calibrating,
eliminating the need to manually calibrate the compass.
The Compass Mini Trip Computer features a driverinteractive display (displays information on outside temperature, compass direction, and trip information). The
display is located on the lower left part of the cluster
below the fuel and engine temperature gauge.
Compass Mini Trip Computer Reset Button
CMTC Reset Button — Secondary Reset Button
Press the left compass/temperature reset button to scroll
through sub menus (i.e. Trip Functions: AVG. Fuel
Economy, DTE, Elapsed Time, and Units (U.S. or Metric).
4
236 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
When the appropriate conditions exist, the following
messages will display in the window below the fuel and
engine temperature gauge:
E . . . . . . . . Eight-point compass headings are displayed
(N, S, E, W, NE, NW, SE, SW)
14°F. . . . . . . . . . . . Temperature (Fahrenheit or Celsius)
AVG . . . . . . . . . Average Fuel Economy (U.S. or Metric)
DTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Distance to Empty
ET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Elapsed Time
NOTE: Temperature and Average Fuel Economy can be
changed from U.S. or Metric. by pressing and holding the
(left) secondary push button.
Compass/Temperature Display
Compass Variance
Compass Variance is the difference between magnetic
North and Geographic North. In some areas of the
country, the difference between magnetic and geographic
North is great enough to introduce some compass error.
In order to ensure compass accuracy, the compass variance should be properly set according to the compass
variance zone map for the vehicle’s current location. The
compass in your vehicle will now automatically compensate for this difference.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 237
NOTE: Magnetic materials such as a laptop computer,
cell phone, and PDA’s (anything with a battery), should
be kept away from the top of the instrument panel. This
is where the compass sensor is located.
To Set the Variance
Start the engine, and leave the transmission gear selector
lever in the PARK position. Press and hold (approximately ten seconds) the compass/temperature reset button until the current variance zone number is displayed.
To change the zone, press and release the reset button to
increment the variance one step. Repeat as necessary,
until the desired variance is achieved.
NOTE: The factory default zone is 8. During programming, the zone value will wrap around from zone 15 to
zone 1.
4
238 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Automatic Compass Calibration
The compass on your vehicle is self-calibrating, eliminating the need to manually calibrate the compass. When
the vehicle is new, the compass may appear erratic and
the CAL indicator message will flash in the EVIC until
the calibration is complete.
A good calibration requires a level surface and an environment free from large metallic objects such as buildings, bridges, underground cables, railroad tracks, etc.
Calibrate the compass by driving slowly, under 5 mph (8
km/h) in one or more complete circles in a area free from
large metallic objects, until the CAL indicator in the EVIC
turns off. The compass will now function normally.
NOTE: Keep all magnetic objects, such as laptop computers, cell phones and PDAs (anything with a battery)
away from the compass sensor which is located in the top
of the instrument panel. These devices can interfere with
compass accuracy and performance.
Manual Compass Calibration
If the compass appears to be inaccurate, you may wish to
manually calibrate the compass. Prior to calibrating the
compass, make sure the proper compass variance value
(zone) is selected (refer to the above “Compass Variance”
for additional information. Then continue to calibrate the
compass as follows:
1. Start the engine, and leave the transmission in the
PARK position.
2. Press and hold (approximately 10 seconds) the
Compass/Temperature reset button until the current
variance zone number is displayed.
3. Release the reset button, then press and hold again
(approximately 10 seconds), until the direction is displayed with the “CAL” indicator on continuously in the
display.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 239
4. To complete the compass calibration, drive the vehicle
in one or more complete 360 degree circles under 5 mph
(8 km/h) in an area free from power lines, large metallic
objects, until the “CAL” indicator turns off. The compass
will now function normally.
Odometer Display
When the appropriate conditions exist, the following
odometer messages will display:
CRUISE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cruise Activated
gASCAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Cap Fault
noFUSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuse Fault
These messages can be manually turned off by pressing
the right reset button (on the instrument cluster).
Trip Odometer (ODO)
This display shows the distance traveled since the last
reset. Press and release the right button (on the instrument cluster) to switch from odometer, to trip A or trip B.
Press and hold the right button while the odometer/trip
odometer is displayed to reset.
Trip A
Shows the total distance traveled for trip A since the last
reset.
Trip B
Shows the total distance traveled for trip B since the last
reset.
4
240 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC) – If Equipped
NOTE: The compass on your vehicle is self-calibrating,
eliminating the need to manually calibrate the compass.
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) features a driver-interactive display. It is located in the lower
left part of the cluster below the fuel and engine temperature gauge. The EVIC consists of the following:
• System Status
• Vehicle information warning message displays
• Personal Settings (customer programmable features)
• Compass heading
• Outside temperature display
EVIC Location
• Trip computer functions
• UConnect™ hands-free communication system displays — If Equipped
• Audio mode display
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 241
When the appropriate conditions exist, the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) displays the following
messages.
• Personal Settings Not Available – Vehicle Not in (automatic transmissions) or vehicle is in motion (manual
transmissions).
• Turn Signal On (with a continuous warning chime)
• Left/Right Front Door Ajar (one or more, with a single
chime if speed is above 1 mph)
• Left Front Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single chime)
• Left Rear Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single chime)
• Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single
chime)
• Right Rear Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single
chime)
• RKE Battery Low (with a single chime)
• Left/Right Rear Door Ajar (one or more, with a single
chime if speed is above 1 mph)
• Door (S) Ajar (with a single chime if vehicle is in
motion)
• Trunk Ajar (with a single chime)
• Headlamps On
• Key In Ignition
4
242 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Distance To Empty (DTE)
EVIC Functions
• Elapsed Time
• Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)
• Personal Settings
EVIC Button
Press the EVIC button until one of the following functions are displayed on the EVIC:
• Compass/Temperature/Audio
• Average Fuel Economy
To Reset The Display
Pressing and holding the EVIC button once will clear the
resettable function currently being displayed. Reset will
only occur if a resettable function is currently being
displayed. To reset all resettable functions, press and
release the EVIC button a second time within three
seconds of resetting the currently displayed function
(Reset ALL will be displayed during this three second
window).
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 243
Compass/Temperature/Audio
Press and release the EVIC button to display one of eight
compass headings to indicate the direction the vehicle is
facing, the outside temperature and the current radio
station.
For additional information regarding the compass, refer
to Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features)
in this section.
Average Fuel Economy
Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset.
When the fuel economy is reset, the display will read
“RESET” or show dashes for two seconds. Then, the
history information will be erased, and the averaging will
continue from where it was before the reset.
Distance To Empty (DTE)
Shows the estimated distance that can be travelled with
the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is
determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous
and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel
tank level. This is not resettable.
NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of
the vehicle, regardless of the DTE displayed value.
When the DTE value is less than 30 miles estimated
driving distance, the DTE display will change to a text
display of ⬙LOW FUEL⬙. This display will continue until
the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a significant amount
of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the ⬙LOW FUEL⬙ text
and a new DTE value will be displayed, based on the
current values in the DTE calculation and the current fuel
tank level.
4
244 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Elapsed Time
Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset
when the ignition switch is in the ACC position. Elapsed
time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON
or START position.
Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)
Refer to Section 5, “Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) for system operation.
Personal Settings (Customer Programmable
Features)
This allows the driver to set and recall features when the
transmission is in PARK (automatic transmission) or the
vehicle is stopped (manual transmissions).
Press and release the EVIC button until Personal Settings
is displayed in the EVIC.
Use the EVIC button to display one of the following
choices:
Language
When in this display you may select different languages
for all display nomenclature, including the trip functions.
Pressing the EVIC button while in this display selects
English, Espanol, Deutsch, Italiano, or Francais depending on availability. As you continue the displayed information will be shown in the selected language.
NOTE: UConnect™ language will not change using the
EVIC. Please refer to “Language Selection” in the
HANDS–FREE COMMUNICATION (UConnect™) — IF
EQUIPPED section of this manual for details.
Lock Doors Automatically at 15 MPH (24 Km/h)
When ON is selected all doors lock automatically when
the speed of the vehicle reaches 15 mph (24 km/h). Press
and hold the EVIC button when in this display until ON
or OFF appears to make your selection.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 245
Auto Unlock On Exit
When ON is selected all the vehicle’s doors will unlock
when the driver’s door is opened if the vehicle is stopped
(manual transmissions) or the vehicle is stopped and the
transmission is in PARK or NEUTRAL position (automatic transmissions). Press and hold the EVIC button
when in this display until ON or OFF appears to make
your selection.
Remote Unlock Driver’s Door 1st
When DRIVER’S DOOR 1st is selected only the driver’s
door will unlock on the first press of the remote keyless
entry unlock button and require a second press to unlock
the remaining locked doors. When REMOTE UNLOCK
ALL DOORS is selected all of the doors will unlock at
the first press of the remote keyless entry unlock button.
Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display until
DRIVER’S DOOR 1st or ALL DOORS appears to make
your selection.
Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock
When ON is selected a short horn sound will occur when
the remote keyless entry LOCK button is pressed. This
feature may be selected with or without the flash lights
on LOCK/UNLOCK feature. Press and hold the EVIC
button when in this display until ON or OFF appears to
make your selection.
Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock
When ON is selected, the front and rear turn signals will
flash when the doors are locked or unlocked using the
remote keyless entry transmitter. This feature may be
selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature
selected. Press and hold the EVIC button when in this
display until ON or OFF appears to make your selection.
Delay Turning Headlamps Off
When this feature is selected the driver can choose to
have the headlamps remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
4
246 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
when exiting the vehicle. Press and hold the EVIC button
when in this display until 0, 30, 60, or 90 appears to make
your selection.
Headlamps On With Wipers (Available with Auto
Headlights Only)
When ON is selected and the headlight switch is in the
AUTO position, the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on. The
headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned
off if they were turned on by this feature. Press and hold
the EVIC button when in this display until ON or OFF
appears to make your selection.
NOTE: Turning the headlights on during the daytime
causes the instrument panel lights to dim. To increase the
brightness, refer to “Lights” in this section.
Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit
When this feature is selected, the power window
switches, radio, hands–free system, DVD video system,
power sunroof, and power outlets will remain active for
up to 60 minutes after the ignition switch has been turned
off. Opening a vehicle door will cancel this feature. Press
and hold the EVIC button when in this display until
“Off”, “45 sec.”, “5 min.”, or “10 min.” appears to make
your selection.
Turn Headlamps on with Remote Key Unlock
When this feature is selected the headlamps will activate
and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are
unlocked using the remote keyless entry transmitter.
Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display until
“OFF”, “30 sec.”, “60 sec.”, or “90 sec.” appears to make
your selection.
Confirmation of Voice Commands — If Equipped
When ON is selected all voice commands from the
U-Connect™ system are confirmed. Press and hold the
EVIC button when in this display until ON or OFF
appears to make your selection.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 247
Display English or Metric
The EVIC, odometer, and navigation system units can be
changed between English and Metric.
Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display until
“US” or “METRIC” appears to make your selection.
Automatic Compass Calibration
The compass on your vehicle is self-calibrating, eliminating the need to manually calibrate the compass. When
the vehicle is new, the compass may appear erratic and
the “CAL” indicator message will flash in the EVIC until
the calibration is complete.
A good calibration requires a level surface and an environment free from large metallic objects such as buildings, bridges, underground cables, railroad tracks, etc.
Calibrate the compass by driving slowly, under 5 mph (8
km/h) in one or more complete circles in a area free from
large metallic objects, until the “CAL” indicator in the
EVIC turns off. The compass will now function normally.
NOTE: Keep all magnetic objects, such as laptop computers, cell phones and PDA’s (anything with a battery)
away from the compass sensor which is located in the top
of the instrument panel. These devices can interfere with
compass accuracy and performance.
Manual Compass Calibration
If the compass appears to be inaccurate, you may wish to
manually calibrate the compass. Prior to calibrating the
compass, make sure the proper Compass Variance Value
is selected (Refer to “Compass Variance” for additional
information). Then continue to calibrate the compass as
follows:
1. Start the engine and leave the transmission in the
PARK position.
4
248 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
2. Press and release the EVIC button several times until
the EVIC displays the Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features) menu.
3. Press and release the EVIC button several times until
“Calibrate Compass (Yes)” is displayed. A long (longer
than two seconds) EVIC button Press will place the
Compass in calibration mode.
4. The “CAL” indicator will come on continuously in the
EVIC display to indicate that the compass is now in the
calibration mode and that the vehicle can now be driven
to calibrate. Press the EVIC button from the ⬙Calibrate
Compass (Yes)⬙ screen will exit the EVIC Customer
Programmable features, and return it to its normal operating mode).
5. Drive the vehicle slowly, under 5 mph (8 km/h),
completing one or more circles (in an area free from large
metal or metallic objects) until the “CAL” indicator turns
off. The compass will now function normally.
Compass Variance
Compass Variance is the difference between magnetic
North and Geographic North. In some areas of the
country, the difference between magnetic and geographic
North is great enough to introduce some compass error.
In order to ensure compass accuracy, the compass variance should be properly set according to the variance
zone map for the vehicle’s current location. The compass
in your vehicle will now automatically compensate for
this difference.
NOTE: Magnetic materials such as a laptop computer,
cell phone, and PDA’s (anything with a battery), should
be kept away from the top of the instrument panel. This
is where the compass sensor is located.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 249
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. Leave the
gear selector lever in PARK.
2. Press and release the EVIC button several times until
you have displayed the Personal Settings (Customer
Programmable Features) menu.
3. Press and release the EVIC button until “Compass
Variance” and the current Variance Value displays in the
EVIC.
4. Press and release the EVIC button to increment the
Variance Value by one, (one button press per update),
until the proper variance zone is selected according to the
map.
NOTE: The factory default Zone is 8. During programming, the Zone value will wrap around from Zone 15 to
Zone 1.
5. Press and release the EVIC button to exit.
4
250 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SETTING THE ANALOG CLOCK
To set the analog clock at the top center of the instrument
panel, press and hold the button until the setting is
correct. The clock will adjust slowly at first and then
quicker the longer the button is held.
Setting The Analog Clock
RADIO GENERAL INFORMATION
Radio Broadcast Signals
The radio will provide excellent reception under most
operating conditions. Like any system, however, automotive radios have performance limitations, due to mobile
operation and natural phenomena, which might lead you
to believe your sound system is malfunctioning. To help
you understand and save you concern about these “apparent” malfunctions, you must understand a point or
two about the transmission and reception of radio signals.
Two Types of Signals
There are two basic types of radio signals: AM or
Amplitude Modulation, in which the transmitted sound
causes the amplitude, or height, of the radio waves to
vary; and FM or Frequency Modulation, in which the
frequency of the wave is varied to carry the sound.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 251
Electrical Disturbances
Radio waves may pick up electrical disturbances during
transmission. They mainly affect the wave amplitude, and
thus remain a part of the AM reception. They interfere very
little with the frequency variations that carry the FM signal.
SALES CODE REF — AM/FM/CD (SINGLE DISC)
RADIO WITH OPTIONAL SATELLITE RADIO AND
HANDS FREE PHONE CAPABILITY
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
side of your radio faceplate.
AM Reception
AM sound is based on wave amplitude, so AM reception can
be disrupted by such things as lightning, power lines and
neon signs.
4
FM Reception
Because FM transmission is based on frequency variations,
interference that consists of amplitude variations can be
filtered out, leaving the reception relatively clear, which is the
major feature of FM radio.
NOTE: The radio, steering wheel radio controls (if
equipped), and six-disc CD/DVD changer (if equipped)
will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition
switch has been turned OFF. Opening a vehicle front door
will cancel this feature.
REF Radio
252 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operating Instructions - Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Press the ON/VOL control to turn the radio ON. Press
the ON/VOL a second time to turn OFF the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
volume control to the right increases the volume and to
the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
For your convenience, the volume can be turned down,
but not up, when the audio system is off and the ignition
is ON.
Mode Button (Radio Mode)
Press the MODE button repeatedly to select between the
CD player and Satellite Radio (if equipped).
SEEK Button (Radio Mode)
Press and release the SEEK button to search for the next
listenable station in either AM/FM or Satellite (if
equipped) mode. Press the right side of the button to seek
up and the left side to seek down. The radio will remain
tuned to the new station until you make another selection. Holding the button will bypass stations without
stopping until you release it.
MUTE Button (Radio Mode)
Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the
speakers. MUTE will display. Press the MUTE button a
second time and the sound from the speakers will return.
Rotating the volume control, turning the radio ON/OFF,
or turning ON/OFF the ignition, will cancel the MUTE
feature.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 253
NOTE: In Hands-Free Phone (if equipped) mode, the
MUTE button mutes the microphone.
SCAN Button (Radio Mode)
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next listenable station in either, AM, FM, or Satellite
(if equipped) frequencies, pausing for five seconds at
each listenable station before continuing to the next. To
stop the search, press SCAN a second time.
PSCAN Button (Radio Mode)
Pressing the PSCAN button causes the tuner to scan
through preset stations in either, AM, FM, or Satellite (if
equipped) frequencies, pausing for five seconds at each
preset station before continuing to the next. To stop the
search, press PSCAN a second time.
TIME Button
Press the TIME button and the time of day will display
for five seconds.
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the TUNE/AUDIO control.
3. After the hours are adjusted, press the TUNE/AUDIO
control to set the minutes. The minutes will begin to
blink.
4. Adjust the minutes using the TUNE/AUDIO control.
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds.
RW/FF (Radio Mode)
Pressing the Rewind/Fast Forward button causes the
tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of
the arrows. This feature operates in either AM, FM or
Satellite (if equipped) frequencies.
4
254 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
TUNE Control (Radio Mode)
Turn the rotary TUNE control clockwise to increase or
counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
Press the rotary TUNE control a fourth time and BAL will
display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to
adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers.
AM/FM Button (Radio Mode)
Press the button to select AM or FM modes.
Press the rotary TUNE control a fifth time and FADE will
display. Turn the TUNE control to the left or right to adjust
the sound level between the front and rear speakers.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Press the rotary TUNE control, and BASS will display.
Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or
decrease the Bass tones.
Press the rotary TUNE control a second time and MID
will display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to
increase or decrease the Mid-Range tones.
Press the rotary TUNE control a third time and TREB will
display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to
increase or decrease the Treble tones.
Press the tune control again or wait five seconds to exit
setting tone, balance, and fade.
RND/SET Button (Radio Mode) To Set The
Pushbutton Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button.
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this station
and press and release that button. If a button is not
selected within five seconds after pressing the SET button, the station will continue to play but will not be
stored into pushbutton memory.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 255
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in
both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM, 12 FM,
and 12 Satellite (if equipped) stations to be stored into
pushbutton memory. The stations stored in SET 2
memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton
twice.
Operating Instructions - CD Mode
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
If the volume control is ON, the unit will switch to CD
mode and begin to play. The display will show the track
number and play time in minutes and seconds. Play will
begin at the start of track one.
Preset Buttons 1 - 6 (Radio Mode)
These buttons tune the Radio to the stations that you
commit to pushbutton memory, 12 AM, 12 FM, and 12
Satellite (if equipped) stations.
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Inserting The Compact Disc (Single CD Player)
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
the CD Player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
radio display.
NOTE:
• On some vehicles, you may insert or eject a disc with
the radio or ignition switch OFF.
4
256 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
OFF, the CD will automatically be pulled into the CD
player.
SCAN Button (CD Mode)
Press this button to play the first 10 seconds of each track.
To stop the scan function, press the button a second time.
• This radio does not play discs with MP3 tracks.
EJECT Button (CD Mode)
Press this button and the disc will unload and
move to the entrance for easy removal. The
unit will switch to the last selected mode.
SEEK Button (CD Mode)
Press the right side of the SEEK button for the next track
on the CD. Press the left side of the button to return to the
beginning of the current track, or return to the beginning
of the previous track if the CD is within the first 10
seconds of the current selection.
MUTE Button (CD Mode)
Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the
speakers. ⬙MUTE⬙ will display. Press the MUTE button a
second time and the sound from the speakers will return.
Rotating the volume control or turning OFF the ignition
will also return the sound from the speakers.
If you do not remove the disc within 15 seconds, it will be
reloaded. The radio mode will continue to appear.
TIME Button (CD Mode)
Press this button to change the display from elapsed CD
playing time to time of day. The time of day will display
for five seconds.
RW/FF (CD Mode)
Press and hold the FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player
will begin to fast forward until FF is released. The RW
(Reverse) button works in a similar manner.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 257
Press and hold the FF button to fast forward through the
tracks. Release the FF button to stop the fast forward
feature. If the RW button is pressed, the current track will
reverse to the beginning of the track and begin playing.
RND/SET Button (Random Play Button) (CD
Mode)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Press the SEEK button to move to the next randomly
selected track.
Press the RND button a second time to stop Random
play.
Operating Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an
MP3 player, cassette player, or microphone and utilize
the vehicle’s audio system to amplify the source and play
through the vehicle speakers.
The auxiliary mode becomes active when an electrical
device is plugged into the AUX jack using a standard 3.5
mm stereo audio cable and the user presses and releases
the MODE button until AUX appears on the display.
NOTE: The radio will return to the last stored mode if
the ignition switch is turned from the OFF/LOCK position to the ACC position, the radio is turned on, and the
radio was previously in the AUX mode.
SEEK Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
4
258 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
MUTE Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the
speakers. ⬙MUTE⬙ will display. Press the MUTE button a
second time and the sound from the speakers will return.
Rotating the volume control or turning off the ignition
will also return the sound from the speakers.
SCAN Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
EJECT Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
PSCAN Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press this button to change the display from elapsed
playing time to time of day. The time of day will display
for five seconds.
RW/FF (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
RND/SET Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
Mode Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press the MODE button repeatedly to select between the
CD player and Satellite Radio (if equipped).
Operating Instructions - Hands-Free Phone — If
Equipped
Refer to the “Hands-Free Phone (UConnect威)” section of
this Owner’s Manual.
Operating Instructions - Satellite Radio — If
Equipped
Refer to the “Satellite Radio” section of this Owner’s
Manual.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 259
SALES CODE RAQ – AM/FM/CD (6-DISC) RADIO
WITH OPTIONAL SATELLITE RADIO,
HANDS-FREE PHONE, AND VIDEO
ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEMS (VES™)
CAPABILITIES
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
side of your radio faceplate.
4
RAQ Radio
Operating Instructions - Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
260 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Press the ON/VOL control to turn the radio ON. Press
the ON/VOL a second time to turn off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
volume control to the right increases the volume and to
the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
For your convenience, the volume can be turned down,
but not up, when the audio system is off and the ignition
is ON.
Mode Button (Radio Mode)
Press the MODE button repeatedly to select between the
CD player, Satellite Radio, or Video Entertainment System (VES)™ (if equipped).
SEEK Button (Radio Mode)
Press and release the SEEK button to search for the next
listenable station in either AM/FM or Satellite (if
equipped) mode. Press the right side of the button to seek
up and the left side to seek down. The radio will remain
tuned to the new station until you make another selection. Holding the button will bypass stations without
stopping until you release it.
MUTE Button (Radio Mode)
Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the
speakers. ⬙MUTE⬙ will be displayed. Press the MUTE
button a second time and the sound from the speakers
will return. Rotating the volume control, turning the
radio ON/OFF, or turning OFF the ignition will also
return the sound from the speakers
NOTE: In Hands-Free Phone (if equipped) mode, the
MUTE button mutes the microphone.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 261
SCAN Button (Radio Mode)
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next listenable station, in either AM, FM or Satellite (if
equipped) frequencies, pausing for five seconds at each
listenable station before continuing to the next. To stop
the search, press SCAN a second time.
MSG or INFO Button (Radio Mode)
Press the MSG or INFO button for an RBDS station (one
with call letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio
Text message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode
only).
TIME Button
Press the TIME button and the time of day will be
displayed for five seconds.
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Press and hold the time button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the TUNE/AUDIO control.
3. After the hours are adjusted, press the TUNE/AUDIO
control to set the minutes. The minutes will begin to
blink.
4. Adjust the minutes by turning the TUNE/AUDIO
control.
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds.
RW/FF (Radio Mode)
Pressing the Rewind/Fast Forward button causes the
tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of
the arrows. This feature operates in either AM, FM or
Satellite (if equipped) frequencies.
TUNE Control (Radio Mode)
Turn the rotary TUNE control clockwise to increase or
counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
4
262 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
AM/FM Button (Radio Mode)
Press the button to select AM or FM Modes.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Press the rotary TUNE control, and BASS will display.
Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or
decrease the Bass tones.
Press the rotary TUNE control a second time and MID
will display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to
increase or decrease the Mid Range tones.
Press the rotary TUNE control a third time and TREBLE
will display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to
increase or decrease the Treble tones.
Press the rotary TUNE control a fourth time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or
left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side
speakers.
Press the rotary TUNE control a fifth time and FADE will
display. Turn the TUNE control to the left or right to
adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers.
Press the rotary TUNE control again to exit setting tone,
balance and fade.
RND/PTY Button (Radio Mode)
Pressing this button once will turn on the PTY mode for
five seconds. If no action is taken during the five second
time out the PTY icon will turn off. Pressing the PTY
button or turning the TUNE rotary knob within five
seconds will allow the program format type to be selected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast
PTY information.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 263
Toggle the PTY button to select the following format
types:
Program Type
No program type or
undefined
Adult Hits
Alert Alert
Classical
Classic Rock
College
Country
Emergency Test
Foreign Language
Information
Jazz
News
Nostalgia
16 Digit-Character Display
None
Adult_Hits
Alert Alert
Classical
Classic_Rock
College
Country
Emergency Test
Foreign_Language
Information
Jazz
News
Nostalgia
Program Type
Oldies
Personality
Public
Rhythm and Blues
Religious Music
Religious Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft Rock
Soft Rhythm and Blues
Sports
Talk
Top 40
Weather
16 Digit-Character Display
Oldies
Personality
Public
Rhythm_and_Blues
Religious_Music
Religious_Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft_Rock
Soft_R_&_B
Sports
Talk
Top_40
Weather
4
264 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
By pressing the SEEK button when the PTY icon is
displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
station with the same selected PTY name. The PTY
function only operates when in the FM mode.
If a preset button is activated while in the PTY (Program
Type) mode, the PTY mode will be exited and the radio
will tune to the preset station.
SET/DIR Button (Radio Mode) — To Set the
Pushbutton Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/DIR button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
window. Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this
station and press and release that button. If a button is
not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET/
DIR button, the station will continue to play but will not
be stored into pushbutton memory.
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET/DIR button twice and SET 2 will show in the
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM,
12 FM and 12 Satellite (if equipped) stations to be stored
into pushbutton memory. The stations stored in SET 2
memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton
twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will be displayed.
Buttons 1 - 6 (Radio Mode)
These buttons tune the Radio to the stations that you
commit to pushbutton memory, 12AM, 12 FM, and 12
Satellite (if equipped) stations.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 265
Operating Instructions - (CD Mode for CD Audio
Play)
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
NOTE: This Radio is capable of playing compact discs
(CD), recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact discs (CD-RW) compact discs with MP3 tracks and
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
the CD Player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
radio display.
CAUTION!
This CD player will accept 4 3/4 in (12 cm) discs only.
The use of other sized discs may damage the CD
player mechanism.
You may eject a disc with the radio OFF.
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
show the disc number, the track number, and index time
in minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the start of
track one.
4
266 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SEEK Button (CD Mode for CD Audio Play)
Press the right side of the SEEK button for the next
selection on the CD. Press the left side of the button to
return to the beginning of the current selection, or return
to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is
within the first 10 seconds of the current selection.
MUTE Button (CD Mode for CD Audio Play)
Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the
speakers. ⬙MUTE⬙ will be displayed. Press the MUTE
button a second time and the sound from the speakers
will return. Rotating the volume control, turning the
radio ON/OFF, or turning OFF the ignition will also
return the sound from the speakers.
SCAN Button (CD Mode for CD Audio Play)
Press the SCAN button to scan through each track on the
CD currently playing.
LOAD/EJECT Button (CD Mode for CD Audio
Play)
LOAD/ EJECT - Load
Press the LOAD/EJECT button and the pushbutton with the corresponding number where
the CD is being loaded. The radio will display
PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT
DISC. After the radio displays ⬙LOAD DISC⬙ insert the
CD into the player.
Radio display will show ⬙LOADING DISC⬙ when the disc
is loading, and “READING DISC” when the radio is
reading the disc.
LOAD / EJT - Eject
Press the LOAD/ EJT button and the pushbutton with the corresponding number where
the CD was loaded and the disc will unload
and move to the entrance for easy removal.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 267
Radio display will show ⬙EJECTING DISC⬙ when the disc
is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc.
Press and hold the LOAD/ EJT button for five seconds
and all CDs will be ejected from the radio.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
15 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will continue to play the non-removed CD. If
the CD is removed and there are other CDs in the radio,
the radio will play the next CD after a two minute
timeout. If the CD is removed and there are no other CDs
in the radio, the radio will remain in CD mode and
display ⬙INSERT DISC” for 10 seconds. If no discs are
inserted within 10 seconds “NO DISCS LOADED” will
be displayed.
On some vehicles a disc can be ejected with the radio and
ignition OFF.
TIME Button (CD Mode for CD Audio Play)
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
RW/FF (CD Mode for CD Audio Play)
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button
works in a similar manner.
Press and hold the FF button to fast forward through the
tracks. Release the FF button to stop the fast forward
feature.
TUNE Control (CD Mode for CD Audio Play)
Pressing the TUNE control allows the setting of the Tone,
Fade, and Balance. See Radio Mode.
AM/FM Button (CD Mode for CD Audio Play)
Switches the Radio to the Radio mode.
4
268 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
RND/PTY Button (Random Play Button) (CD Mode
for CD Audio Play)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Press the SEEK button to move to the next randomly
selected track.
Press the RND button a second time to stop Random
play.
Buttons 1 - 6 (CD Mode for CD Audio Play)
Selects disc positions 1 - 6 for Play/Load/Eject.
Notes On Playing MP3 Files
The radio can play MP3 files, however, acceptable MP3
file recording media and formats are limited. When
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restrictions.
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CD-ROM, CD-R and CD-RW.
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file normally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
• Maximum number of directory levels: 15
• Maximum number of files: 255
• Maximum number of folders: 100
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 269
• Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
• Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a
3-character extension)
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a
3-character extension)
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
longer disc loading times.
Supported MP3 File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.mp3 extension as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.mp3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
VBR bit rates.
MPEG
Specification
Sampling Frequency (kHz)
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
48, 44.1, 32
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
24, 22.05, 16
Bit rate (kbps)
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
16, 8
4
270 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title and album title
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
Playback of MP3 Files
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
by the following:
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
• Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the Disc at Once option before
writing to the disc.
Operating Instructions - (CD Mode for MP3 Audio
Play)
SEEK Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Pressing the right side of the SEEK button plays the next
MP3 File. Pressing the left side of the SEEK button plays
the beginning of the MP3 file. Pressing the button within
the first ten seconds plays the previous file.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 271
LOAD/EJECT Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
LOAD/EJECT - Load
Press the LOAD/ EJECT button and the pushbutton with the corresponding number where
the CD is being loaded. The radio will display
PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT
DISC. After the radio displays ⬙LOAD DISC⬙ insert the
CD into the player.
Radio display will show ⬙LOADING DISC⬙ when the disc
is loading.
LOAD/EJECT - Eject
Press the LOAD/ EJECT button and the pushbutton with the corresponding number where
the CD was loaded and the disc will unload
and move to the entrance for easy removal.
Radio display will show ⬙EJECTING DISC⬙ when the disc
is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
15 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will continue to play the non-removed CD. If
the CD is removed and there are other CDs in the radio,
the radio will play the next CD after a two minute
timeout. If the CD is removed and there are no other CD’s
in the radio, the radio will remain in CD mode and
display ⬙INSERT DISC” for two minutes. After two
minutes the radio will go to the previous tuner mode.
MSG or INFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Press and MSG or INFO button while playing MP3 disc.
The radio scrolls through the following TAG information:
Song Title, Artist, File Name, and Folder Name (if available).
Press the MSG or INFO button once more to return to
⬙elapsed time⬙ priority mode.
4
272 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Press and hold the MSG or INFO button while in the
message display priority mode or elapsed time display
priority mode will display the song title for each file.
Turn the TUNE control to display available folders or
move through available folders. Press the TUNE control
to select a folder.
RW/FF (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Press the FF side of the button to move forward through
the MP3 selection.
Buttons 1 - 6 (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Selects disc positions 1 - 6 for Play/Load/Eject.
TUNE Control (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Pressing the TUNE control allows the adjustment of
Tone, Balance, and Fade.
AM/FM Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Switches back to Radio mode.
RND/ PTY Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Pressing this button plays files randomly.
SET/DIR Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Press the SET/DIR Button to display folders, when
playing an MP3 discs that have a file/folder structure.
Operating Instructions - Hands-Free Phone (If
Equipped)
Refer to Hands Free Phone in Section 3 of this Owner’s
Manual.
Operating Instructions - Satellite Radio Mode (If
Equipped)
Refer to the Satellite Radio section of this Owner’s
Manual.
Operating Instructions - Video Entertainment
System (VES™) (If Equipped)
Refer to separate Video Entertainment System (VES™)
Guide.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 273
SATELLITE RADIO — IF EQUIPPED
Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcasting technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to
coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius™ Satellite Radio. This service offers over 130 channels of music,
sports, news, entertainment, and programming for children, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.
System Activation
To activate your Sirius Satellite Radio service, call the
toll-free number 888-539-7474, or visit the Sirius web site
at www.sirius.com. Please have the following information available when activating your system:
1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID).
2. Credit card information.
3. Your Vehicle Identification Number.
Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID)
The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification Number is needed to activate your Sirius Satellite Radio
system. To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following
steps:
ESN/SID Access With REF Radios
With the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY position and
the radio OFF, press the CD Eject and Time buttons
simultaneously for 3 seconds. The first four digits of the
twelve-digit ESN/SID number will be displayed. Press
the SEEK UP button to display the next four digits.
Continue to press the SEEK UP button until all twelve
ESN/SID digits have been displayed. The SEEK DOWN
will page down until the first four digits are displayed.
The radio will exit the ESN/SID mode when any other
button is pushed, the ignition is turned OFF, or 5 minutes
has passed since any button was pushed.
4
274 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
ESN/SID Access With RAQ Radios
With the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY position and
the radio OFF, press the CD Eject and TIME buttons
simultaneously for 3 seconds. All twelve ESN/SID numbers will be displayed. The radio will exit the ESN/SID
mode when any other button is pushed, the ignition is
turned OFF, or 5 minutes has passed since any button
was pushed.
ESN/SID Access With Navigation Radios
Please refer to your Navigation User’s Manual.
Selecting Satellite Mode in REF, and RAQ, Radios
Selecting Satellite Mode — REF Radio
Press the MODE button repeatedly until the word ⬙SAT⬙
appears in the display.
A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio
mode.
Selecting Satellite Mode — RAQ Radio
Press the MODE button repeatedly until the word ⬙SAT⬙
appears in the display.
These radios will also display the current station name
and program type. For more information such as song
title and artist press the MSG or INFO button.
A CD or tape may remain in the radio while in the
Satellite radio mode.
Selecting a Channel
Press and release the SEEK or TUNE knob to search for
the next channel. Press the top of the button to search up
and the bottom of the button to search down. Holding the
TUNE button causes the radio to bypass channels until
the button is released.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 275
Press and release the SCAN button (if equipped) to
automatically change channels every 7 seconds. The
radio will pause on each channel for 7 seconds before
moving on to the next channel. The word ⬙SCAN⬙ will
appear in the display between each channel change. Press
the SCAN button a second time to stop the search.
NOTE: Channels that may contain objectionable content
can be blocked. Contact Sirius Customer Care at 888-5397474 to discuss options for channel blocking or unblocking. Please have your ESN/SID information available.
Storing and Selecting Pre-Set Channels
In addition to the 12 AM and 12 FM pre-set stations, you
may also commit 12 satellite stations to push button
memory. These satellite channel pre-set stations will not
erase any AM or FM pre-set memory stations. Follow the
memory pre-set procedures that apply to your radio.
Using the PTY (Program Type) Button (if
equipped)
Follow the PTY button instructions that apply to your
radio.
PTY Button ⴖSCANⴖ
When the desired program type is obtained, press the
⬙SCAN⬙ button within five seconds. The radio will play 7
seconds of the selected channel before moving to the next
channel of the selected program type. Press the ⬙SCAN⬙
button a second time to stop the search.
NOTE: Pressing the ⬙SEEK⬙ or ⬙SCAN⬙ button while
performing a music type scan will change the channel by
one and stop the search. Pressing a pre-set memory
button during a music type scan, will call up the memory
channel and stop the search.
4
276 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
PTY Button ⴖSEEKⴖ
When the desired program is obtained, press the ⬙SEEK⬙
button within five seconds. The channel will change to
the next channel that matches the program type selected.
Satellite Antenna
To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the
roof around the rooftop antenna location. Metal objects
placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause
decreased performance. Larger luggage items should be
placed as far forward as possible. Do not place items
directly on or above the antenna. The luggage rack (if
equipped), should also not be positioned directly above
the antenna.
Reception Quality
Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the
following reasons.
• The vehicle is parked in an underground parking
structure or under a physical obstacle.
• Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the
form of short audio mutes.
• Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can
cause intermittent reception.
• Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can
cause signal blockage.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 277
CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
To keep the CD/DVD discs in good condition, take the
following precautions:
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
surface.
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
wiping from center to edge.
3. Do not apply paper, paper CD labels, or tape to the
disc; avoid scratching the disc.
4. Do not use solvents such as benzine, thinner, cleaners,
or antistatic sprays.
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
8. Do not play discs that are small in size or have
irregular shapes.
RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES
Under certain conditions, the cellular phone being ON in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by relocating the cellular phone antenna. This condition
is not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance
does not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
turned down or off during cellular phone operation.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
Climate Controls
The Climate Control System allows you to balance the
temperature, amount, and direction of air circulating
throughout the vehicle. The controls are located in the
center instrument panel, below the radio.
4
278 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The air conditioning system of your vehicle contains
R-134a, a refrigerant that does not deplete the ozone layer
in the upper atmosphere.
The controls are as follows:
Fan Control
Use this control to regulate the
amount of air forced through the
system in any mode you select.
The fan speed increases as you
move the control to the right from
the OFF position.
Mode Control (Air Direction)
The mode control allows you to
choose from several patterns of air
distribution. You can select either
a primary mode, as identified by
the symbols, or a blend of two of
these modes. The closer the control is to a particular mode, the
more air distribution you receive
from that mode
Panel
Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument
panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct air
flow.
Bi-Level
Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 279
NOTE: There is a difference in temperature between the
upper and lower outlets for added comfort. The warmer
air goes to the floor outlets. This feature gives improved
comfort during sunny but cool conditions.
Floor
Air is directed through the floor outlets and side
window demist outlets with a small amount
through the defrost outlet.
Mix
Air is directed through the floor, defrost and side
window demist outlets. This setting works best in
cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat at
the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining
comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
Defrost
Air is directed through the windshield and side
window demist outlets. Use this mode with maximum fan and temperature settings for best windshield
and side window defrosting.
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in
both Mix and Defrost or a blend of these modes even if
the A/C button has not been pressed and the indicator
lamp is off. This dehumidifies the air to help dry the
windshield. To improve fuel economy, use these modes
only when necessary.
4
280 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION!
If the Defroster is not working the windshield and
windows may become fogged and your visibility will
be greatly diminished. See your authorized dealer as
soon as possible. the windshield and windows may
become fogged and your visibility will be greatly
diminished.
Air Outlets
The airflow from each of the instrument panel outlets can
be adjusted for direction and turned on or off to control
air flow.
NOTE: For maximum airflow to the rear seat passengers, the center instrument panel outlets can be aimed, so
that the left center outlet is directed toward the right rear
passenger and the right center outlet is directed toward
the left rear passenger.
Temperature Control
Use this control to regulate the
temperature of the air inside the
passenger compartment. The blue
area of the scale indicates cooler
temperatures while the red area
indicates warmer temperatures.
NOTE: If your air conditioning performance seems
lower than expected, check the front of the A/C condenser: located in front of the radiator, for an accumulation of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray
from behind the radiator and through the condenser.
Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce air flow to the
condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 281
Air Conditioning
MAX A/C
Rotate this control to engage the
Air Conditioning. A lamp will illuminate when the Air Conditioning System is engaged
To quickly cool the vehicle interior
follow the steps listed below:
4
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor will not engage
until the engine has been running for about 10 seconds.
1. Set the Temperature Control to Max Cool.
2. Set the Mode Control to Panel or Be-Level.
3. Press the Recirculation Button and the A/C Button.
4. Adjust the Fan Control to desired air flow setting.
282 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE:
• Recirculation Mode will not operate in floor, mix or
defrost modes.
NOTE: Continuous use of the recirculate mode may
make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may
occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
• See “Circulation Control” in this section, for proper or
extended use of this position.
In cold or damp weather, the use of the Recirculate
position will cause windows to fog on the inside because
of moisture build up inside the vehicle. For defogging,
select the Outside Air position.
Circulation Control
Rotate this control to choose between outside air intake or recirculation of the air inside the vehicle. A lamp will illuminate when
you are in recirculate mode. Only
use the recirculate mode to temporarily block out any outside
odors, smoke, or dust and to cool
the interior rapidly upon initial
start up in very hot or humid weather.
NOTE: Recirculation Mode will not operate in floor, mix
or defrost modes.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 283
Operating Tips
4
Control Settings Chart
284 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Window Fogging
Vehicle side windows tend to fog on the inside in mild
rainy or humid weather. To clear the windows, use the
A/C, PANEL and blower controls. Direct the panel
outlets toward the side windows. Do not use recirculate
without A/C for long periods as fogging may occur.
Summer Operation
Vehicles must be protected with a high-quality antifreeze
coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to
raise the boiling point of the coolant for protection
against overheating. A 50% concentration is recommended.
Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly removed by using the defrost position.
Outside Air Intake
When operating the system, make sure the air intake,
directly in front of the windshield, is free of ice, slush,
snow or other obstructions such as leaves. Leaves collected in the air-intake plenum may reduce air flow and
plug the plenum water drains.
If the fogging problem persists, clean the inside window
surfaces. The cause of undue fogging may be dirt collecting on the inside surface of the glass
NOTE: In cold weather, the use of the recirculate
position will cause windows to fog on the inside because
of moisture build up inside the vehicle. For maximum
defogging, use the Outside Air position.
The blower air will heat faster in cold weather if you use
only a low blower speed for the first few minutes of
vehicle operation.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 285
Side Window Demisters
A side window demister outlet is at each end of the
instrument panel. These nonadjustable outlets direct air
toward the side windows when the system is in either the
FLOOR, MIX, or DEFROST mode. The air is directed at
the area of the windows through which you view the
outside mirrors.
4
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
䡵 Automatic Transaxle — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 294
▫ Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
▫ Brake/Transmission Interlock System . . . . . . . 295
▫ Manual Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
▫ Automatic Transaxle Ignition Interlock
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
▫ Normal Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
▫ Extremely Cold Weather (Below ⫺20°F Or
⫺29°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
▫ If The Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
▫ Turbocharger ⬙Cool-Down⬙ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
▫ Four-Speed Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . 296
▫ Reset Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
▫ Gear Ranges For The Four-Speed Automatic
Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
5
288 STARTING AND OPERATING
䡵 AutoStick — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
䡵 Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
▫ AutoStick Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
▫ AutoStick General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . . 316
䡵 Manual Transaxle Operation — If Equipped . . . . 301
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . 317
▫ 2.4 Liter Turbo — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
䡵 Tires — General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
▫ Manual Transaxle — Recommended Shift
Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
▫ Downshifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
䡵 Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
䡵 Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
䡵 Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
䡵 Traction Control System — If Equipped . . . . . . . 311
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
▫ Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
▫ Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 325
▫ Limited-Use Spare — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 325
▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
STARTING AND OPERATING 289
▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
▫ Alignment And Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
䡵 Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
▫ Fuel System Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
䡵 Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
䡵 Tire Rotation Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
䡵 Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
䡵 Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
▫ Base System — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
䡵 Fuel Requirements — Gasoline Engines . . . . . . . 337
▫ 2.4L And 2.4L Standard Turbo Engines . . . . . . 337
▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
䡵 Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
䡵 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
▫ Common Towing Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
▫ Trailer Hitch Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
▫ Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
5
290 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
䡵 Recreational Towing (Behind Motorhome, Etc.) . . 356
▫ Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
(Flat Towing With All Four Wheels On The
Ground) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
▫ Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
STARTING AND OPERATING 291
STARTING PROCEDURES
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both
inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts.
WARNING!
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the keys in the
ignition. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
WARNING!
Be sure to turn off the engine if you want to rest or
sleep in your car. Accidents can be caused by inadvertently moving the gear selector lever or by pressing the accelerator pedal. This may cause excessive
heat in the exhaust system, resulting in overheating
and vehicle fire which may cause serious or fatal
injuries.
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE
The gear selector lever must be in the NEUTRAL or
PARK position before you can start the engine. Apply the
brakes and depress the gear selector lever knob button
before shifting to any driving gear.
NOTE: You must press the brake pedal before shifting
out of PARK.
5
292 STARTING AND OPERATING
MANUAL TRANSAXLE
Before starting the engine fully apply the parking brake,
press the clutch pedal to the floor and shift the gear
selector lever in NEUTRAL.
NOTE: The engine will not start unless the clutch pedal
is pressed to the floor.
NORMAL STARTING
Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine does
not require pumping or depressing the accelerator pedal.
Simply turn the ignition switch to the START position
and release when the engine starts. If the engine has not
started within three seconds, slightly depress the accelerator pedal while continuing to crank. If the engine fails
to start within 15 seconds, turn the ignition switch to the
OFF position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the
“NORMAL STARTING” procedure above.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transaxle cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel could
enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has
started, ignite and damage the converter and vehicle.
If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables
may be used to obtain a start from another vehicle.
This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly, so follow the procedure carefully. See Section 6
of this manual for jump starting instructions.
EXTREMELY COLD WEATHER (BELOW ⫺20°F or
⫺29°C)
To insure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of an
externally powered electric engine block heater (available
from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
STARTING AND OPERATING 293
IF THE ENGINE FAILS TO START
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“NORMAL STARTING” procedure, it may be flooded.
Push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and
hold it there. Crank the engine for no more than 15
seconds. This should clear any excess fuel in case the
engine is flooded. Leave the ignition key in the ON
position, release the accelerator pedal and repeat the
“NORMAL STARTING” procedure.
WARNING!
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing
serious personal injury.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank the
engine for more than 15 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to
15 seconds before trying again.
AFTER STARTING
The idle speed will automatically decrease as the engine
warms up.
TURBOCHARGER ⴖCOOL-DOWNⴖ
NOTE: Letting the engine idle after severe operation
allows the turbine housing to cool to normal operating
temperature. Do not increase the idle speed manually.
5
294 STARTING AND OPERATING
The following chart should be used as a guide in determining the amount of engine idle time required to
sufficiently cool down the turbocharger before shut
down, depending upon the type of driving and the
amount of cargo.
TURBOCHARGER ⴖCOOL-DOWNⴖ CHART
Driving Conditions
IdleBefore Shut Down
Normal
0 min
Aggressive/Heavy Load 3 min
Trailer Tow
5 min
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE — IF EQUIPPED
You must step on the brake pedal and depress the gear
selector lever knob button before you will be able to shift
out of PARK.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transaxle may occur if the following
precautions are not observed:
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to a
complete stop.
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle has
come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle
speed.
• Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL into
any forward gear when the engine is above idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is
firmly on the brake pedal.
NOTE: You must step on the brake pedal and depress
the gear selector lever knob button before you will be
able to shift the gear selector lever out of PARK.
STARTING AND OPERATING 295
WARNING!
It is dangerous to shift the gear selector lever out of
PARK, or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher
than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly on the
brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly
forward or in REVERSE. You could lose control of the
vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift the
gear selector lever into gear when the engine is idling
normally and when your right foot is firmly on the
brake pedal.
BRAKE/TRANSMISSION INTERLOCK SYSTEM
This system prevents you from shifting the gear selector
lever out of PARK and into any gear unless the brake
pedal is pressed. This system is active only while the
ignition switch is in the ON or ACC positions. Always
step on the brake pedal and depress the gear selector
lever knob button before shifting out of PARK.
NOTE: If a malfunction occurs, the system will function
normally, except you may be able to shift the vehicle from
PARK, without depressing the brake pedal. If this occurs
obtain service from an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE IGNITION INTERLOCK
SYSTEM
This system prevents the key from being removed unless
the gear selector lever is in PARK and the gear selector
lever knob push button is out. It also prevents shifting
out of PARK unless the key is in the ACC or ON
positions, and the brake pedal is depressed.
NOTE: If a malfunction occurs, the system will trap the
key in the ignition cylinder to warn you that this safety
5
296 STARTING AND OPERATING
feature is inoperable. The engine can be started and
stopped but the key cannot be removed until you obtain
service.
FOUR-SPEED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE
The electronically controlled transaxle provides a precise
shift schedule. The transaxle electronics are self calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be
somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few shift cycles.
RESET MODE
The transaxle is monitored electronically for abnormal
conditions. If a condition is detected that could cause
damage, the transaxle shifts automatically into second
gear. The transaxle remains in second gear despite the
forward gear selected. PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL
will continue to operate. This second gear limp-in feature
allows the vehicle to be driven to a dealer for service
without damaging the transaxle.
In the event that the problem has been momentary, the
transaxle can be reset to regain all forward gears.
Stop the vehicle and shift the gear selector lever into
PARK.
Turn the Key to OFF then restart the engine.
Shift the gear selector lever into DRIVE and resume
driving.
If the transaxle cannot be reset, authorized dealer service
is required.
NOTE: Even if the transaxle can be reset, it is recommended that you visit an authorized dealer at your
earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has
diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could
recur.
STARTING AND OPERATING 297
GEAR RANGES FOR THE FOUR-SPEED
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
NEUTRAL positions into another gear range.
PARK
PARK supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never use PARK while the vehicle is in motion. Apply
the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range.
Always apply the parking brake first, and then shift the
gear selector lever into the PARK position.
WARNING!
Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in and near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, you should always
shift the vehicle into PARK, remove the key from the
ignition, and apply the parking brake. Once the key
is removed from the ignition, the transmission gear
selector lever is locked in the PARK position, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement. Furthermore, you should never leave children unattended
inside a vehicle.
5
298 STARTING AND OPERATING
The following indicators should be used to ensure that
you have engaged the transmission gear selector lever
into the PARK position:
• When shifting the gear selector lever into PARK,
depress the button on the gear selector lever knob and
firmly move the lever all the way forward until it
stops.
• Look at the shift indicator window on the console to
ensure it is in the PARK position.
• When engaged in PARK, you will not be able to move
the gear selector lever rearward without depressing
the gear selector lever knob button
CAUTION!
Before shifting the gear selector lever out of PARK,
you must turn the ignition from LOCK to ON so the
steering wheel and gear selector lever are released.
Otherwise, damage to the steering column or gear
selector lever could result.
REVERSE
Shift into this range only after the vehicle has come to a
complete stop.
NEUTRAL
The engine may be started in this range.
DRIVE / OVERDRIVE
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides smoothest upshifts and downshifts,
and best fuel economy.
STARTING AND OPERATING 299
When frequent transaxle shifting occurs while using the
DRIVE/OVERDRIVE range, such as when operating the
vehicle under heavy loading conditions (in hilly terrain,
traveling into strong head winds, or while towing trailers), use the [3] range.
[1] Low
This range should be used for maximum engine braking
when descending steep grades. In this range, up shifts
will occur only to prevent engine over speed while down
shifts from [2] to [1] will occur as early as possible.
[3] DRIVE
This range eliminates shifts into OVERDRIVE. The transaxle will operate normally in first and second while in
this range.
AUTOSTICK — IF EQUIPPED
AUTOSTICK is a driver-interactive transmission that
offers manual gear shifting capability to provide you
with more control. AUTOSTICK allows you to maximize
engine braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and
downshifts, and improve overall vehicle performance.
This system can also provide you with more control
during passing, city driving, cold slippery conditions,
mountain driving, trailer towing, and many other situations.
NOTE: Using the [3] range while operating the vehicle
under heavy operating conditions will improve performance, fuel economy, and extend transaxle life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build up.
Use the [3] range when descending steep grades to
prevent brake system distress.
5
300 STARTING AND OPERATING
AUTOSTICK Operation
The AUTOSTICK position is just below the OVERDRIVE
position and is identified by the word “AUTOSTICK”.
When you place the gear selector lever in the
AUTOSTICK position, it can be moved from side to side.
Moving the lever to the left (-) triggers a downshift and to
the right (+) an upshift. The gear position will be shown
in the transmission gear display, located in the instrument cluster.
You can shift in or out of the AUTOSTICK mode at any
time without taking your foot off the accelerator pedal. If
you choose the OVERDRIVE mode, the transmission will
operate automatically; shifting between the four available gears. When you wish to engage AUTOSTICK,
simply move the gear selector lever to the AUTOSTICK
position. The transmission will remain in the current gear
until an upshift or downshift is chosen.
Move the lever back to the OVERDRIVE position to shift
out of the AUTOSTICK mode.
AUTOSTICK General Information
• The transmission will automatically upshift from first
to second gear and from second to third gear when
engine speed reaches about 6,300 RPM.
• Downshifts from third to second gear above 74 mph
(119 km/h) and from second to first gear above 41
mph (66 km/h) will be ignored.
• You can start out in first, second, or third gear. Shifting
into fourth gear can occur only after vehicle speed
reaches 15 mph (24 km/h).
• The transmission will automatically downshift to first
gear when coming to a stop.
• Starting out in third gear is helpful in snowy or icy
conditions.
STARTING AND OPERATING 301
• While in the AUTOSTICK mode, Speed Control will
only function in third or fourth gear.
Downshifting out of third gear will turn off the speed
control.
• If the system detects powertrain overheating, the
transmission will revert to the automatic shift mode
and remain in that mode until the powertrain cools off.
• If the system detects a problem it will disable the
AUTOSTICK mode and the transmission will return to
the automatic mode until the problem is corrected.
MANUAL TRANSAXLE OPERATION — IF
EQUIPPED
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the
vehicle unattended without having the parking
brake fully applied. The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle,
especially on an incline.
5
302 STARTING AND OPERATING
Fully depress the clutch pedal before you shift gears. As
you release the clutch pedal, lightly depress the accelerator pedal.
Use each gear in numerical order - do not skip a gear. Be
sure the gear selector lever is in FIRST gear, (not THIRD),
when starting from a standing position. Damage to the
clutch can result from starting in THIRD.
For most city driving you will find it easier to use only
the lower gears. For steady highway driving with light
accelerations, FIFTH gear is recommended.
Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal, or
try to hold the vehicle on a hill with the clutch pedal
partially engaged. This will cause abnormal wear on the
clutch.
Never shift the gear selector lever into REVERSE until the
vehicle has come to a complete stop.
Five-Speed Shift Pattern
NOTE: During cold weather, until the transaxle lubricant is warm, you may experience slightly higher shift
efforts. This is normal and not harmful to the transaxle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 303
2.4 LITER TURBO — IF EQUIPPED
Five-Speed Shift Pattern With Turbo
The neutral position of the gear selector lever is located
between THIRD and FOURTH gear. This is the position
the gear selector lever will return to automatically when
neutral is selected. When shifting into FIFTH gear, be
sure to press the gear selector lever all the way to the
right to avoid accidentally selecting THIRD gear. Also,
use care when selecting FIRST gear to avoid accidentally
shifting the gear selector lever into REVERSE.
When moving the gear selector lever into REVERSE press
the lever to the left until the resistance is overcome. When
the ignition switch is in the ON position, a chime will
sound to confirm that reverse has been selected and the
backup lights will illuminate.
NOTE: Listen for the audible chime to confirm REVERSE gear is properly selected. Never shift the gear
selector lever into REVERSE until the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
5
304 STARTING AND OPERATING
MANUAL TRANSAXLE — RECOMMENDED SHIFT
SPEEDS
To use your manual transaxle for optimal fuel economy,
it should be upshifted as listed in Table 1.
Table 1 - Manual Transaxle Normal Acceleration
And Cruise Shift Speeds In mph (km/h)
Engine
2.4L
Turbo
2.4L
NonTurbo
Mode
Acceleration
Cruise
Acceleration
Cruise
1 to 2
2 to 3
3 to 4
4 to 5
15 (24)
25 (40)
40 (65)
45 (72)
15 (24)
25 (40)
42 (68)
45 (72)
15 (24)
25 (40)
40 (65)
45 (72)
15 (24)
25 (40)
42 (68)
45 (72)
For improved performance, your manual transaxle may
be upshifted up to the maximum speeds listed in Table 2
(within legal speed limits).
Table 2 - Manual Transaxle Maximum Performance
Shift Speeds In mph (km/h)
Engine
2.4L
1 to 2
30 (48)
2 to 3
60 (97)
3 to 4
85 (136)
4 to 5
115 (185)
If you exceed these speeds, you may notice the engine cut
in and out. This is caused by an electronic limiter in the
engine computer. The engine will run normally when
you reduce engine speed.
Downshifting
Proper downshifting will improve fuel economy and
prolong engine life.
CAUTION!
If you skip a gear while downshifting or downshift
at too high an engine speed, you could damage the
engine, transmission, or clutch.
STARTING AND OPERATING 305
To maintain a safe speed and prolong brake life, shift
down to SECOND or FIRST gear when descending a
steep grade.
When turning a corner, or driving up a steep grade,
downshift early so that the engine will not be overburdened.
PARKING BRAKE
When the parking brake is applied with the
ignition on, the BRAKE Light in the instrument
cluster will come on.
NOTE: This light only shows that the parking brake is
on. It does not show the degree of brake application.
If the parking brake is applied while the vehicle is
moving, a chime will sound to alert the driver. The chime
will sound up to 10 times or until the vehicle has
returned to a stop.
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is set. To set the parking brake, pull up firmly on
the lever. Always shift the gear selector lever into the
PARK position (automatic transaxle) or into the REVERSE position (manual transaxle). To release the parking brake, apply the brake pedal, pull up slightly on the
lever, then depress the button on the end of the lever and
push the lever fully down toward the floor.
5
306 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: The parking brake lever will not release unless
the lever is pulled up slightly past its applied position.
selector lever out of PARK. As an added precaution, turn
the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade
and away from the curb on a uphill grade.
You should always apply the parking brake before leaving the vehicle.
WARNING!
Parking Brake Lever
When parking on a hill, it is important to set the parking
brake before placing the gear selector lever in PARK,
otherwise the load on the automatic transaxle locking
mechanism may make it difficult to move the gear
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the keys in
the ignition. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and an accident.
STARTING AND OPERATING 307
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with power assisted brakes as
standard equipment. In the event power assist is lost for
any reason (for example, repeated brake applications
with the engine off), the brakes will still function. However, the effort required to brake the vehicle will be much
greater than that required with the power system operating.
If either of the two hydraulic systems lose normal capability, the remaining system will still function with some
loss of overall braking effectiveness. This will be evident
by increased pedal travel during application and greater
pedal force required to slow or stop. In addition, if the
malfunction is caused by an internal leak, as the brake
fluid in the master cylinder drops, the brake warning
indicator will light.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly an accident. Driving with your foot resting
or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You wouldn’t have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
Driving a vehicle with the brake light on is dangerous. A significant decrease in braking performance or
vehicle stability during braking may occur. It will
take you longer to stop the vehicle or will make your
vehicle harder to control. You could have an accident.
Have the vehicle checked immediately.
5
308 STARTING AND OPERATING
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS) — IF
EQUIPPED
The ABS provides increased vehicle stability and brake
performance under most braking conditions. The system
automatically “pumps” the brakes during severe braking
conditions to prevent wheel lock-up.
WARNING!
Pumping of the ABS will diminish their effectiveness and may lead to an accident. Pumping makes
the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly on
your brake pedal when you need to slow down or
stop.
WARNING!
• The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and
tires or the traction afforded.
• An ABS cannot prevent accidents, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. Only
a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent
accidents.
• The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety
or the safety of others.
STARTING AND OPERATING 309
The ABS telltale light monitors the Anti-Lock
Brake System. The light will come on when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON position
and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or comes on while driving, it
indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system
is not functioning and that service is required. However,
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock
brakes. If the ABS light does not come on when the
Ignition switch is turned to the ON position, have the
bulb repaired as soon as possible.
If both the Brake Warning Light and the ABS Light
remain on, the Anti-Lock brakes (ABS) and Electronic
Brake Force Distribution (EBD) systems are not functioning properly. Immediate repair to the ABS system at an
authorized dealer is required.
When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph (11 km/h), you
may also hear a slight clicking sound as well as some
related motor noises. These noises are the system performing its self check cycle to ensure that the ABS system
is working properly. This self-check occurs each time the
vehicle is started and accelerated past 7 mph (11 km/h).
ABS is activated during braking under certain road or
stopping conditions. ABS-inducing conditions can include ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose
debris, or panic stops.
You also may experience the following when the brake
system goes into Anti-Lock:
• The ABS motor running (it may continue to run for a
short time after the stop).
• A clicking sound of solenoid valves.
• Brake pedal pulsations.
5
310 STARTING AND OPERATING
• A slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end
of the stop.
These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
WARNING!
The Anti-Lock Brake System contains sophisticated
electronic equipment that may be susceptible to
interference caused by improperly installed or high
output radio transmitting equipment. This interference can cause possible loss of Anti-Lock braking
capability. Installation of such equipment should be
performed by qualified dealership professionals.
All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and
type and tires must be properly inflated to produce
accurate signals for the computer.
POWER STEERING
The standard power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical
steering capability if power assist is lost.
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these conditions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
NOTE: Increased noise levels at the end of the steering
wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate
that there is a problem with the power steering system.
Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steering
pump may make noise for a short amount of time. This is
due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering system. This
noise should be considered normal, and it does not in any
way damage the steering system.
STARTING AND OPERATING 311
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced power steering
assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others.
Service should be obtained as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The Traction Control System (TCS) will improve acceleration and steering on slippery surfaces by reducing tire
spin. The system reduces wheel slip and maintains
traction at the driving (front) wheels by engaging the
brake on the wheel that is losing traction. When this
occurs the TCS indicator lamp located above the instrument cluster odometer will flash. The system operates at
speeds below 35 mph (56 km/h).
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end
of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering
fluid temperature and it should be avoided when
possible. Damage to the power steering pump may
occur.
TCS OFF Switch
A push-button at the center of the instrument panel,
below the radio, turns the Traction Control System ON or
OFF.
5
312 STARTING AND OPERATING
The system is always in the “ON” mode unless:
• The TCS OFF switch has been used to turn the system
off;
• There is a Anti-Lock Brake System malfunction;
• There is a Traction Control System malfunction;
• The system has been automatically deactivated to
prevent damage to the brake system due to overheated
brake temperatures.
NOTE: Extended heavy use of Traction Control may
cause the system to deactivate and turn on the TCS
indicator lamp located in the instrument cluster.
This is to prevent overheating of the brake system and is
a normal condition. The system will remain disabled for
about 4 minutes until the brakes have cooled. The system
will automatically reactivate and turn off the TCS indicator lamp.
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, ice, or snow, turn
the Traction Control System Off before attempting to
“rock” the vehicle free.
STARTING AND OPERATING 313
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire Markings
• European Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
• LT (Light Truck)-Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
NOTE:
• P (Passenger)-Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P” molded
into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• Temporary spare tires are high-pressure compact
spares designed for temporary emergency use only.
Tires designed to this standard have the letter “T”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
• High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards, and it begins with the tire diameter molded
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
5
314 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Size Designation:
P = Passenger Car tire size based on U.S. design standards
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger Car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light Truck tire based on U.S. design standards
T = Temporary spare tire
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65 = Aspect ratio in percent (%).
— Ratio of section height to section width of tire
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
— ⬙R⬙ means radial construction
—⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
STARTING AND OPERATING 315
EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
— A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
— A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions
— The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions,
and posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) Tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra load (or reinforced) tire
Light Load = Light load tire
C, D, E = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load — Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure — Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
5
316 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire,
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with
white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date code,
located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN
on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the
vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side, then you
will find it on the inboard side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
— This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards, and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—03 means the 3rd week.
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—01 means the year 2001
— Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the
year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
STARTING AND OPERATING 317
Tire Loading and Tire Pressure
Tire and Loading Information Placard
Tire Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on either the face of the driver’s door or the driver’s side
B-Pillar.
5
Tire And Loading Information Placard
Tire Placard Location
This placard tells you important information about the:
1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle
2) total weight your vehicle can carry
3) tire size designed for your vehicle
4) cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
318 STARTING AND OPERATING
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section
of this manual.
combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
“Vehicle Loading” in this section.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX
lbs.” on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg”
on your vehicle’s placard.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will be five
150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
STARTING AND OPERATING 319
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs (295
kg) {(since 5 x 150 = 750, and 1400 – 750 = 650 lbs (295
kg)}.
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
NOTE: The following table shows examples on how to
calculate total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations
and number and size of occupants. This table is for
illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for
the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
NOTE: For the following example, the combined weight
of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs (392
kg).
5
320 STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING AND OPERATING 321
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
1. Safety—
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause
accidents.
• Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can result in
tire failure.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
• Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause
damage that result in tire failure.
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
• Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect vehicle
handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of
vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems.
You could lose control of your vehicle.
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to
the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
5
322 STARTING AND OPERATING
2. Economy—
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear
patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal
wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for
earlier tire replacement. Under-inflation also increases
tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consumption.
maximum loaded vehicle condition. These pressure conditions will be found in the “Supplemental Tire Pressure
Information” section of this manual.
3. Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability—
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed either on
the face of the driver’s door or on the driver’s side “B”
pillar.
Some vehicles may have Supplemental Tire Pressure
Information for vehicle loads that are less than the
Tire Placard Location
The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as
inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least
once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to
STARTING AND OPERATING 323
check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement
when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they are under-inflated.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap (if equipped). This
will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the
valve stem, which could damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure.” Cold tire inflation pressure
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1
mi (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire
inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
5
324 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Pressures for High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious accident. Don’t drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75
mph (120 km/h).
Radial Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause an accident. Always use radial ply tires in sets of four (or six, in case
of trucks with dual rear wheels). Never combine
them with other types of tires.
Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in
the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your
authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs.
STARTING AND OPERATING 325
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use with
radial tires. It is engineered to be used on your style
vehicle only. Since this tire has limited tread life, the
original tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled at the first opportunity.
WARNING!
Temporary use spare tires are for emergency use only.
With these tires, do not drive more than 50 mph (80
km/h). Temporary use spare tires have limited tread
life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire/wheel
on the vehicle at any given time.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with the
compact spare installed. Damage to the vehicle may
result.
Limited-Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency
use on your vehicle. This tire is identified by a limiteduse spare tire warning label located on the limited-use
spare tire and wheel assembly. This tire may look like the
5
326 STARTING AND OPERATING
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same tire,
replace (or repair) the original tire and reinstall on the
vehicle at the first opportunity.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h)
or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without
stopping when you are stuck.
WARNING!
For additional information, refer to “Freeing A Stuck
Vehicle” in Section 6.
The limited-use spare tires are for emergency use
only. Installation of this limited-use spare tire affects
vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive more
than 50 mph (80 km/h). Keep inflated to the cold tire
inflation pressure listed on either your tire placard or
limited-use spare tire and wheel assembly. Replace
(or repair) the original tire at the first opportunity
and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could
result in loss of vehicle control.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30
mph (48 km/h) or for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck, and don’t let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
STARTING AND OPERATING 327
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
to help you in determining when your tires should be
replaced.
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes 1/16 in (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced.
Many states have laws requiring tire replacement at this
point.
Life of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
• Driving style
• Tire pressure
• Distance driven
5
328 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have an accident resulting
in serious injury or death.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manufacturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed. (Refer to the paragraph on
“Tread Wear Indicators”). Refer to the “Tire and Loading
Information” placard for the size designation of your tire.
The service description and load identification will be
found on the original equipment tire. Failure to use
equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle. We recommend
that you contact your original equipment or an authorized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire
specifications or capability.
STARTING AND OPERATING 329
WARNING!
CAUTION!
• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than that
specified for your vehicle. Some combinations of
unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension
dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and braking of
your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling
and stress to steering and suspension components.
You could lose control and have an accident resulting
in serious injury or death. Use only the tire and wheel
sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle.
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer
readings.
Alignment and Balance
Poor suspension alignment may result in:
• Fast tire wear.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity,
other than what was originally equipped on your
vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index could
result in tire overloading and failure. You could lose
control and have an accident.
• Uneven tire wear, such as feathering and one-sided
wear.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
Tires may also cause the vehicle to pull to the left or right.
Alignment will not correct this condition. See your
authorized dealer for proper diagnosis.
• Vehicle pull to right or left.
5
330 STARTING AND OPERATING
Improper alignment will not cause vehicle vibration.
Vibration may be a result of tire and wheel out-ofbalance. Proper balancing will reduce vibration and
avoid tire cupping and spotty wear.
TIRE CHAINS
Due to limited clearance, tire chains are not recommended.
CAUTION!
Damage to the vehicle may result if tire chains are
used.
SNOW TIRES
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during Winter. Standard tires are of the all-season type
and satisfy this requirement as indicated by the M+S
designation on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and
type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only
in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the
safety and handling of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph (120
km/h).
STARTING AND OPERATING 331
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates and tend to develop irregular wear patterns.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of the
tires. The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile
with aggressive tread designs such as those on all-season
type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow, and wet traction levels and contribute to
a smooth, quiet ride.
Follow the recommended tire rotation frequency for your
type of driving found in the “Maintenance Schedules”
Section of this manual. More frequent rotation is permissible, if desired. The reason(s) for any rapid or unusual
wear should be corrected before rotating. The suggested
rotation method is the “forward-cross” shown in the
diagram below.
5
332 STARTING AND OPERATING
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) — IF
EQUIPPED
• The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn
the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle
recommended cold placard pressure.
• The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about
1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C). This means that
when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set
based on cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as
the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven
for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mi (1.6
km) after a three hour period. The cold tire inflation
pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation
pressure molded into the tire sidewall. Refer to the
“Tires – General Information” in this section for
information on how to properly inflate the vehicle’s
tires. The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle
is driven - this is normal and there should be no
adjustment for this increased pressure.
• TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the
tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning
limit for any reason, including low temperature effects
and natural pressure loss through the tire.
• TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not
turn off until the tire pressure is at or above the
recommended cold placard pressure. Once the low tire
pressure warning has been illuminated, you must
increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold
placard pressure in order for the TPM Light to turn off.
The system will automatically update and the TPM
Light will turn off once the system receives the updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need to be
STARTING AND OPERATING 333
driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h)
in order for the TPMS to receive this information.
− For example, your vehicle may have a recommended cold (parked for more than three hours)
placard pressure of 33 psi (227 kPa). If the ambient
temperature is 68° F (20° C) and the measured tire
pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa), a temperature drop to
20° F (-7° C) will decrease the tire pressure to
approximately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire pressure is
sufficiently low enough to turn ON the TPM Light.
Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to
rise to approximately 28 psi (193 kPa), but the TPM
Light will still be ON. In this situation, the TPM
Light will turn OFF only after the tires are inflated to
the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure
value.
CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system
operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same
size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can
cause sensor damage. Do not use aftermarket tire
sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is
equipped with a TPMS, as damage to the sensors
may result.
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem, which could damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor.
5
334 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
• TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and
maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire failure or
condition.
• TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
• TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance,
and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct
tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure gauge,
even if under-inflation has not reached the level to
trigger illumination of the TPM Light.
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in
the tire.
BASE SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
readings to the Receiver Module.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly
and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
• Receiver Module
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
STARTING AND OPERATING 335
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The TPM Light will illuminate in the instrument
cluster and a chime will sound when tire pressure
is low in one or more of the four active road tires.
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible,
check the inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle,
and inflate each tire to the vehicle’s recommended cold
placard pressure value. Once the system receives the
updated tire pressures, the system will automatically
update and the TPM Light will turn off. The vehicle may
need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph (25
km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information.
Check TPMS Warning
The TPM Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and
then remain on solid when a system fault is detected. The
system fault will also sound a chime. If the ignition key is
cycled, this sequence will repeat, providing the system
fault still exists. The TPM Light will turn off when the
fault condition no longer exists. A system fault can occur
due to any of the following:
1. Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving
next to facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as
the TPM sensors.
2. Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains
materials which may block radio wave signals.
3. Excessive accumulation of snow or ice around the
wheels or wheel housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
NOTE:
1. The compact spare tire (if so equipped) does not have
a tire pressure monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS
will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire.
5
336 STARTING AND OPERATING
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
limit, upon the next ignition key cycle, a chime will
sound and the TPM Telltale Light will turn ON due to the
low tire.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 10 minutes above 15
mph (25 km/h), the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and
off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will
sound and the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for
75 seconds and then remain on solid.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire, and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare,
the TPMS will update automatically and the TPM Telltale
Light will turn OFF, as long no tire pressure is below the
low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active road
tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10
minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the TPMS
to receive this information.
GENERAL INFORMATION
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the
following licenses:
United States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KR5S120123
Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2671-S120123
STARTING AND OPERATING 337
FUEL REQUIREMENTS — GASOLINE ENGINES
2.4L AND 2.4L STANDARD TURBO ENGINES
2.4L standard engines are designed to meet
all emission regulations and provide excellent fuel economy and performance when
using high quality unleaded “regular”
gasolines having an octane rating of 87.
The use of premium gasoline is not recommended. Under normal conditions, the use of premium
gasoline will not provide a benefit over high quality
unleaded “regular” gasolines, and in some circumstances
may result in poorer performance.
REFORMULATED GASOLINE
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”.
Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates, and are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.
The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gasolines. Properly blended reformulated gasolines will provide excellent performance and durability of engine and
fuel system components.
GASOLINE/OXYGENATE BLENDS
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxygenates such as 10% ethanol, MTBE, and ETBE. Oxygenates are required in some areas of the country during the
winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions.
Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in
your vehicle.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or E85
Ethanol. Use of these blends may result in starting
and driveability problems and may damage critical
fuel system components.
5
338 STARTING AND OPERATING
Problems that result from using methanol/gasoline or
E85 Ethanol blends are not the responsibility of the
manufacturer. While MTBE is an oxygenate made from
Methanol, it does not have the negative effects of Methanol.
MMT IN GASOLINE
MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase the octane number. Gasolines blended with MMT offer no performance
advantage beyond gasolines of the same octane number
without MMT. Gasolines blended with MMT have shown
to reduce spark plug life and reduce emission system
performance in some vehicles. The manufacturer recommends using gasolines without MMT. Since the MMT
content of gasoline may not be indicated on the pump,
you should ask your gasoline retailer whether or not
his/her gasoline contains MMT.
It is even more important to look for gasolines without
MMT in Canada, because MMT can be used at levels
higher than those allowed in the United States.
MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformulated gasolines.
MATERIALS ADDED TO FUEL
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
detergents or other additives is not needed under normal
conditions and would result in additional cost. Therefore
you should not have to add anything to the fuel.
FUEL SYSTEM CAUTIONS
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
STARTING AND OPERATING 339
• The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance,
damage the emission control system.
• An out-of-tune engine, or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions, can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or
malfunctioning and may require immediate service.
Contact your dealer for service assistance.
CARBON MONOXIDE WARNINGS
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
• The use of fuel additives which are now being sold as
octane enhancers is not recommended. Most of these
products contain high concentrations of methanol.
Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems
resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not
the responsibility of the manufacturer.
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas which can kill.
Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a
garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle is
stopped in an open area with the engine running for
more than a short period, adjust the ventilation system
to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every time
5
340 STARTING AND OPERATING
the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions
repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side
windows fully open.
NOTE: When removing the fuel filler cap, lay the cap
tether in the hook, located on the fuel filler cap door
reinforcement.
• Keep the liftgate closed when driving your vehicle to
prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous exhaust gases from entering the vehicle.
ADDING FUEL
The fuel tank filler tube has a restricting door about 2
inches (50 mm) inside the opening. If using a portable
container, it should have a flexible nozzle long enough to
force open the restricting door.
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
The gas cap is behind the fuel filler door, on the passenger’s side of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or damaged,
be sure the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle.
Gas Cap Tether Hook
NOTE: If the gas cap is lost or damaged, be sure the
replacement cap is for use with this vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 341
CAUTION!
WARNING!
• Damage to the fuel system or emission control
system could result from using an improper fuel
tank filler tube cap (gas cap).
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near
the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the
tank filled.
• A poorly fitting gas cap could let impurities into
the fuel system.
• Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and federal fire regulations and doing so will cause the malfunction
indicator light to turn on.
• A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to turn on.
• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling. When the fuel
nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is full.
• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on
the ground while filling.
5
342 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
• Tighten the gas cap until you hear a “clicking” sound.
This is an indication that the gas cap is tightened
properly. The Malfunction Indicator Light in the instrument cluster may turn on if the gas cap is not
secured properly. Make sure that the gas cap is tightened each time the vehicle is refueled.
• When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel
tank is full.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
“gASCAP” message will be displayed in the Odometer/
Trip Odometer in the instrument cluster. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Description” in Section 4 of this manual.
Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the
odometer/trip odometer reset button to turn the message
off. If the problem continues, the message will appear the
next time the vehicle is started. This might indicate a
damaged cap. If the problem is detected twice in a row,
the system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL). Resolving the problem will turn the MIL light
off.Refer to “Onboard Diagnostic System — OBDII” in
Section 7 of this manual for more information.
VEHICLE LOADING
Vehicle Loading Capacities
Front Seat Occupants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Rear Seat Occupants (sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Rear Seat Occupants (convertible) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Luggage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 lbs (52 kg)
Rated Vehicle Capacity (sedan) . . . . . . . 865 lb (392 kg)
Rated Vehicle Capacity (convertible) . . . 715 lb (324 kg)
STARTING AND OPERATING 343
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and information
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer carefully review this information to tow your load as efficiently and
safely as possible.
To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements
and recommendations in this manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
COMMON TOWING DEFINITIONS
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
exceed the GVWR.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The gross trailer weight (GTW) is the weight of the trailer
plus the weight of all cargo, consumables and equipment
(permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the trailer in its
⬙loaded and ready for operation⬙ condition. The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded
trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight of the trailer
must be supported by the scale.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The gross combination weight rating (GCWR) is the total
permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when
weighed in combination. (Note that GCWR ratings include a 68 kg (150 lbs) allowance for the presence of a
driver).
5
344 STARTING AND OPERATING
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have an accident.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the
trailer. In most cases it should not be less than 10% or
more than 15% of the trailer load. You must consider this
as part of the load on your vehicle.
Frontal Area
The maximum height and maximum width of the front of
a trailer.
Trailer Sway Control
The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be
installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue
that typically provides adjustable friction associated with
the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer
swaying motions while traveling.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kind of
hitches are the most popular on the market today and
they’re commonly used to tow small- and medium-sized
trailers.
STARTING AND OPERATING 345
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying leverage through spring (load) bars. They are typically used
for heavier loads, to distribute trailer tongue weight to
the tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When
used in accordance with the manufacturers’ directions, it
provides for a more level ride, offering more consistent
steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing
safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control
also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability.
Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load
equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue
Weights (TW) and may be required depending on Vehicle
and Trailer configuration / loading to comply with gross
axle weight rating (GAWR) requirements.
WARNING!
An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, braking performance, and could result in an accident.
Weight Distributing Systems may not be compatible
with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with your hitch
and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational
Vehicle dealer for additional information.
TRAILER HITCH CLASSIFICATION
Your vehicle may be factory equipped for safe towing of
trailers weighing over 1,000 lbs (454 kg) with the optional
Trailer Tow Prep Package. See your authorized dealer
service center for package content.
5
346 STARTING AND OPERATING
The following chart provides the industry standard for
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) chart for the Max. GTW towable for your
given drivetrain.
TRAILER HITCH CLASSIFICATION
Max. GTW
Class
(Gross Trailer Wt.)
Class I - Light Duty
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty
3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on
your vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 347
TRAILER TOWING WEIGHTS (MAXIMUM TRAILER WEIGHT RATINGS)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
Engine/Transmission
TRAILER TOWING WEIGHTS
Max. GTW
Frontal Area
(Gross Trailer Wt.)
Max. Tongue Wt.
(See Note 1)
2.4L N/A and 2.4L Turbo/
20 Sq Ft
1000 lbs (454 kg)
110 lbs (50 kg)
Automatic*
2.4L N/A and 2.4L Turbo/
20 Sq Ft
1000 lbs (454 kg)
110 lbs (50 kg)
Manual*
* N/A (Naturally Aspirated)
Note 1 – The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo,
and should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard. Refer to the following “Tire–Safety Information” section in this manual.
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
5
348 STARTING AND OPERATING
TRAILER AND TONGUE WEIGHT
Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your
vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the
rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side
which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer.
Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of
many trailer accidents.
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
your bumper or trailer hitch.
STARTING AND OPERATING 349
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
• The tongue weight of the trailer.
• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
put in or on your vehicle.
• The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options, or dealer-installed options,
must be considered as part of the total load on your
vehicle. Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard in the Tire Safety Information Section of this manual
for the maximum combined weight of occupants and
cargo for your vehicle.
TOWING REQUIREMENTS
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain components the following guidelines are recommended:
CAUTION!
• Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 mi (805 km)
of vehicle operation. Doing so may damage your
vehicle.
• During the first 500 mi (805 km) of trailer towing,
limit your speed to 50 mph (80 km/h).
Perform the maintenance listed in Section 8 of this
manual. When towing a trailer, never exceed the GAWR,
or GCWR, ratings.
5
350 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
• Improper towing can lead to an injury accident.
• Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have an accident.
• Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to the
frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the
chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough
slack for turning corners.
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade.
When parking, apply the parking brake on the tow
vehicle. Put the tow vehicle automatic transmission in
PARK. Always, block or ⬙chock⬙ the trailer wheels.
• GCWR must not be exceeded.
• When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can cause a
loss of control, poor performance or damage to brakes,
axle, engine, transmission, steering, suspension, chassis structure or tires.
• Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
1. GVWR
2. GTW
3. GAWR
STARTING AND OPERATING 351
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized
(This requirement may limit the ability to always
achieve the 10% to 15% range of tongue weight as a
percentage of total trailer weight).
Towing Requirements — Tires
• Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
• Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to the
Tires–General Information section of this manual on
Tire Pressures for proper tire inflation procedures.
• Also, check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation
pressures before trailer usage.
• Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
before towing a trailer. Refer to the Tires–General
Information section of this manual on Tread Wear
Indicators for the proper inspection procedure.
• When replacing tires refer to the Tires–General Information section of this manual on Replacement Tires
for proper tire replacement procedures. Replacing tires
with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase
the vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR limits.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
• Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
personal injury.
• An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
5
352 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1,000
lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of 2,000
lbs (907 kg).
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
WARNING!
Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake system and cause it to fail. You might not have brakes
when you need them and could have an accident.
Towing any trailer will increase your stopping distance. When towing you should allow for additional
space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front
of you. Failure to do so could result in an accident.
STARTING AND OPERATING 353
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights & Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- or sevenpin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness and connector.
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles
wiring harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following illustrations.
5
4-Pin Connector
354 STARTING AND OPERATING
TOWING TIPS
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping
and backing the trailer in an area away from heavy
traffic.
Towing Tips — Automatic Transmission
The OVERDRIVE/DRIVE range can be selected when
towing. However, if frequent shifting occurs while in this
range, the [3] range should be selected.
7-Pin Connector
NOTE: Using the [3] range while operating the vehicle
under heavy operating conditions will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build up. This action will also
provide better engine braking.
The automatic transmission fluid and filter should be
changed if you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than
45 minutes of continuous operation. See the “Maintenance Schedule” in Section 8 of this manual for transmission fluid change intervals.
STARTING AND OPERATING 355
NOTE: Check the automatic transmission fluid level
before towing.
Towing Tips — Electronic Speed Control (If
Equipped)
• Don’t use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
• When using the speed control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
you can get back to cruising speed.
• Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency.
Towing Tips — Cooling System
To reduce potential for engine and transmission overheating, take the following actions:
• City Driving
When stopped for short periods of time, put transmission
in NEUTRAL but do not increase engine idle speed.
• Highway Driving
Reduce speed.
• Air Conditioning
Turn off temporarily.
• Refer to Cooling System Operating information in the
Maintenance Section of this manual for more information.
5
356 STARTING AND OPERATING
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.)
NOTE: If the vehicle requires towing make sure all four
wheels are off the ground.
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle (Flat
towing with all four wheels on the ground)
If your vehicle is equipped with a manual transaxle, it
may be towed with all four wheels on the ground, in a
forward direction, at any legal highway speed, for any
distance, if the transaxle is in NEUTRAL.
CAUTION!
Recreational towing on vehicle’s equipped with automatic transaxle’s is not recommended.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
䡵 Driving On Slippery Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
䡵 If Your Engine Overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
▫ Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
䡵 Jacking And Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
▫ Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
▫ Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
䡵 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
▫ Spare Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
䡵 Towing A Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
▫ Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
▫ With Ignition Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
▫ Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
▫ Without The Ignition Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
䡵 Jump-Starting Procedures Due To A Low
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
䡵 Convertible Top Manual Override . . . . . . . . . . . 373
6
358 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER
If it is necessary to leave the vehicle to go for service, the
flasher system will continue to operate with the ignition
key removed and the vehicle locked.
NOTE: With extended use, the flasher may wear down
your battery.
Hazard Warning Switch
The flasher switch is located on the instrument
panel, below the radio. Depress the switch and
both cluster indicators and all front and rear
directional signals will flash. Depress the
switch again to turn Hazard Warning Flashers off.
Do not use this emergency warning system when the
vehicle is in motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled
and is creating a safety hazard for other motorists.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.
• On the highways — Slow down.
• In city traffic — While stopped, put transaxle in
neutral, but do not increase engine idle speed.
If the pointer rises to the H (red) mark, the instrument
cluster will sound a chime. Pull over and stop the vehicle
with the engine at idle, when safe. Turn off the air
conditioning and wait until the pointer drops back into
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 359
the normal range. If the pointer remains on the H (red)
mark for more than a minute, turn the engine off immediately and call for service.
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
an impending overheat condition. If your air conditioner
is on, turn it off. The air conditioning system adds heat to
the engine cooling system and turning off the A/C
removes this heat. You can also turn the Temperature
control to maximum heat, the Mode control to floor, and
the fan control to High. This allows the heater core to act
as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
from the engine cooling system.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If temperature gauge reads “H”, pull
over and stop the vehicle with the engine at idle,
when safe. Turn the air conditioner off and wait until
the pointer drops back into the normal range. After
appropriate action has been taken, if the pointer
remains on the “H”, turn the engine off immediately,
and call for service.
6
360 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call a service center if your
vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the
hood yourself, refer to Section 7, Maintenance, of this
manual. Follow the warnings under the Cooling
System Pressure Cap paragraph.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING!
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. Never start or run
the engine while the vehicle is on a jack. If you
need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
• The jack is designed to use as a tool for changing
tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the
vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should
be jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 361
JACK LOCATION
The jack and jack-handle are stowed behind the right rear
side trim panel in the cargo area.
SPARE TIRE STOWAGE
The compact spare tire is stowed under the rear of the
vehicle by means of a hook/basket mechanism. To remove or stow the compact spare, use the jack handle to
rotate the “spare tire drive” nut. The nut is located under
the rear scuff plate at the right rear of the cargo area, just
inside the liftgate opening.
6
Jack Storage
Do not attempt to raise this vehicle using a bumper jack.
Spare Tire Storage
362 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Spare Tire Removal
Lift up the cover and fit the jack-handle over the drive
nut. Rotate the nut to the left until you can remove the
swivel hook from the stowage basket. Swing the basket
down to remove the compact spare tire.
CAUTION!
The hook is designed for use with the jack handle
only. Use of an air wrench or other power tools is not
recommended and can damage the winch.
PREPARATIONS FOR JACKING
Park the vehicle on a firm level surface, avoid ice or
slippery areas, set the parking brake and place the gear
selector in PARK (automatic transaxle) or REVERSE
(manual transaxle). Turn OFF the ignition.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning Flasher.
• Block both the front and rear
of the wheel diagonally opposite the jacking position. For
example, if changing the right
front tire, block the left rear
wheel.
• Passengers should not remain in the vehicle while the
vehicle is being jacked.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 363
JACKING INSTRUCTIONS
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
Jack Warning Label
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from
the edge of the roadway as possible before raising
the vehicle.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
• Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic
transmission in park; a manual transmission in
reverse.
6
364 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the
valve stem facing the ground.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and
for lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
• Turn on the Hazard warning flasher.
1. Remove the scissors jack and lug wrench from the
stowage bag.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 365
NOTE: If equipped with a center cap that covers the
wheel nuts, pry off the cap using the small end of the lug
wrench. To reinstall the cap, make sure it is properly
lined up before pushing it on to the wheel.
the jack screw to the right until the jack head is properly
engaged with the lift area closest to the wheel to be
changed.
2. Loosen, but do not remove, the wheel nuts by turning
them to the left one turn while the wheel is still on the
ground.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on the
cross-member below the radiator, on the front suspension cross-member, or on the rear axle assembly.
3. There are two front jacking locations on each side of
the body and rear jacking locations located on the trailing
arm bracket under the triangular cut out symbol. Turn
6
Jacking Locations
Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is
securely engaged.
366 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
4. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the right,
using the swivel wrench. Raise the vehicle only until the
tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is
obtained to install the spare tire. Minimum tire lift
provides maximum stability.
WARNING!
To avoid possible personal injury, handle the wheel
covers with care to avoid contact with any sharp
edges.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
5. Remove the wheel nuts and pull the wheel and wheel
covers where applicable off the hub. Install the spare
wheel and wheel nuts with the cone shaped end of the
nuts toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the nuts. To avoid
the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not tighten
the nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered.
NOTE: The wheel cover is held on the wheel by the
wheel nuts. When reinstalling original wheel, properly
align the wheel cover to the valve stem, place the wheel
cover onto the wheel, then install the wheel nuts.
6. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left.
7. Finish tightening the nuts. Push down on the wrench
while tightening the wheel nuts. Alternate nuts until each
nut has been tightened twice. Correct wheel nut torque is
100 ft. lbs (135 N·m). If you doubt that you have
tightened the nuts correctly, have them checked with a
torque wrench by your dealer or at a service station.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 367
8. Remove the wheel blocks and lower the jack until it is
free. Stow the lug wrench, and jack in their designated
location. Secure all parts using the means provided.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire
repaired or replaced immediately.
9. Place the deflated (flat) tire in the cargo area, have the
tire repaired or replaced as soon as possible.
10. Check the tire pressure as soon as possible. Correct
pressure as required.
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES DUE TO A LOW
BATTERY
WARNING!
Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever
the hood is raised. It can start anytime the ignition
switch is on. You can be hurt by the fan.
6
368 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transaxle cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel could
enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has
started, ignite and damage the converter and vehicle.
If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables
may be used to obtain a start from another vehicle.
This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly, so follow this procedure carefully.
1. Wear eye protection and remove any metal jewelry
such as watch bands or bracelets that might make an
inadvertent electrical contact.
2. When boosting from a battery in another vehicle, park
that vehicle within booster cable reach but without
letting the vehicles touch. Set parking brake, place automatic transaxle in PARK (manual transaxle in NEUTRAL) and turn ignition to OFF for both vehicles.
3. Turn off the heater, radio and all unnecessary electrical
loads.
4. Connect one end of a jumper cable to the positive
terminal of the booster battery. Connect the other end of
the jumper cable to the positive terminal of the discharged battery.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 369
WARNING!
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution; do not allow
battery fluid to contact eyes, skin or clothing. Don’t
lean over battery when attaching clamps or allow the
clamps to touch each other. If acid splashes in eyes or
on skin, flush the contaminated area immediately
with large quantities of water.
A battery generates hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. Keep flame or spark away from
the vent holes. Do not use a booster battery or any
other booster source with an output that exceeds 12
volts.
5. Connect the other cable, first to the negative terminal
of the booster battery and then to the negative terminal of
the discharged battery. Make sure you have a good
contact.
6. If the vehicle is equipped with Sentry Key Immobilizer, turn the ignition switch to the ON position for 3
seconds before moving the ignition switch to the START
position.
7. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, then start the
engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
8. When removing the jumper cables, reverse the sequence exactly. Be careful of the moving belts and fan.
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
ACCELERATION
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slippery surfaces may cause the front wheels to pull erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs when
there is a difference in the surface traction under the front
(driving) wheels.
6
370 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the
front wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle
and possibly have an accident. Accelerate slowly and
carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction
(ice, snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).
2. Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.
3. Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first
become visible.
4. Keep the tires properly inflated.
5. Maintain enough distance between your vehicle and the
vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden stop.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
TRACTION
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or
complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To
reduce this possibility, the following precautions should
be observed:
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when roads are
slushy.
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with Traction Control,
turn the system OFF before attempting to “rock” the vehicle.
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it
can often be moved by a rocking motion. Turn your
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
front wheels. Then shift back and forth between Reverse
and First gear. Usually the least accelerator pedal pressure to maintain the rocking motion without spinning the
wheels is most effective.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 371
WARNING!
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
With Ignition Key
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30
mph (48 km/h) when you are stuck. And don’t let
anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the
speed.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transaxle overheating and failure. It can
also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels above
30 mph (48 km/h).
Four Speed Automatic Transaxle
Your vehicle may be towed under the following conditions: The steering column must be unlocked and the
gear selector must be in NEUTRAL, the distance to be
towed must not exceed 100 miles (160 km), and the
towing speed must not exceed 44 mph (72 km/h). If the
transaxle is not operative, or if the vehicle is to be towed
more than 100 miles (160 km), the vehicle must be towed
with the front wheels off the ground to avoid damage to
the transaxle.
Manual Transaxle
Your vehicle may be towed in a forward direction, with
all 4 wheels on the ground, and the gearshift lever is in
NEUTRAL. If the transaxle is not operative, the vehicle
must be towed with the front wheels off the ground.
6
372 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
All Transaxles
CAUTION!
If the vehicle being towed requires steering, the
ignition switch must be in the ACC position, not in
the LOCK positions.
Do not attempt to use sling type equipment when
towing. When securing vehicle to flat bed truck, do
not attach to front or rear suspension components.
Damage to your vehicle may result from improper
towing.
If it is necessary to use the accessories while being towed
(wipers, defrosters, etc.), the key must be in the ON
position, not the ACC position. Make certain the transaxle remains in NEUTRAL.
Without The Ignition Key
Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed
with the ignition in the LOCK position. A dolly should be
used under the front wheels if the rear wheels are raised.
Proper towing equipment is necessary to prevent damage to the vehicle.
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle (Flat
Towing With All Four Wheels On The Ground)
If your vehicle is equipped with a manual transaxle, it
may be towed in a forward direction, at any legal
highway speed, for any distance, if the transaxle is in
NEUTRAL.
If the ignition key is not available, vehicles with automatic transaxles can not be flat towed at any time.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 373
CONVERTIBLE TOP MANUAL OVERRIDE
If your vehicle is experiencing electrical failure (low
battery, etc.) and it is necessary to raise the convertible
top, perform the following steps:
1. Locate the convertible top motor bypass screw, which
is found in the trunk under the convertible top storage
area.
2. Turn the screw counterclockwise until the screw stops.
This will relieve the hydraulic pressure and allow the
convertible top to be raised manually.
6
Bleeder Screw
374 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
3. Using the latch handle raise the top until the two pins
seat themselves in the windshield header.
4. Rotate the latch handle clockwise to open the latches.
5. Pull down and rotate the handle counterclockwise to
engage the latches.
Engaging Convertible Top
6. Raise the handle into the stowed position.
7. Close the convertible top motor bypass screw by
turning the screw clockwise until it stops. Tighten the
screw securely.
NOTE: Failure to tighten the bypass screw securely can
cause convertible top operating concerns.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 2.4L Turbo Engine Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
䡵 2.4L Engine Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
▫ Drive Belts — Check Condition And Tension . . 388
䡵 Onboard Diagnostic System — OBD II . . . . . . . . 380
▫ Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
▫ Ignition Wiring System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
䡵 Emissions Inspection And Maintenance
Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
▫ Catalytic Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
䡵 Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
䡵 Authorized Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
䡵 Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
▫ Engine Timing Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
▫ Crankcase Emission Control System . . . . . . . . 390
▫ Fuel Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
▫ Air Cleaner Element (Air Filter) . . . . . . . . . . . 391
7
376 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
▫ Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
▫ Manual Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
▫ Power Steering – Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
▫ Front Suspension Ball Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
▫ Steering Linkage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
▫ Windshield Washer Reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
▫ Hoses And Vacuum/Vapor Harnesses . . . . . . . 403
▫ Fuel System Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
䡵 Convertible Top Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
▫ Washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
▫ General Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
▫ Cloth Top Additional Cleaning Procedure . . . . 418
▫ Cloth Top Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
▫ Weather Strip Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
䡵 Integrated Power Module (IPM) . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
䡵 Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
䡵 Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 377
䡵 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
▫ Center High Mounted Stop Light . . . . . . . . . . 428
▫ Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
䡵 Fluids And Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
▫ Front Park/Turn Signal/Side Marker Lights . . 426
䡵 Fluids, Lubricants And Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . 430
▫ Front Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 426
▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
▫ Tail/Stop, And Rear Turn Signal Lights . . . . . . 427
▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
▫ Back Up Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
7
378 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
2.4L TURBO ENGINE COMPARTMENT
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 379
2.4L ENGINE COMPARTMENT
7
380 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light.” It will
also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your dealer for service as soon as
possible.
CAUTION!
• Prolonged driving with the “Malfunction Indicator Light” on could cause further damage to the
emission control system. It could also affect fuel
economy and driveability. The vehicle must be
serviced before any emissions tests can be performed.
• If the “Malfunction Indicator Light” is flashing
while the engine is running, severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 381
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
After fuel is added, the vehicle diagnostic system can
determine if the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly
installed, or damaged. A gASCAP message will be displayed in the instrument cluster. Tighten the gas cap until
a ⬙clicking⬙ sound is heard. This is an indication that the
gas cap is properly tightened. Press the odometer reset
button to turn the message off. If the problem persists,
the message will appear the next time the vehicle is
started. This might indicate a damaged cap. If the problem is detected twice in a row, the system will turn on the
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). Resolving the problem will turn the MIL light off.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies the Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL) is functioning and is not on
when the engine is running, and that the OBD II system
is ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, recently had a dead battery, or a battery replacement. If the OBD II system should be determined not
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
7
382 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Your vehicle has a simple ignition key-actuated test,
which you can use prior to going to the test station. To
check if your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must
do the following:
1. Insert your ignition key into the ignition switch.
2. Turn the ignition to the ON position, but do not crank
or start the engine.
3. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start
this test over.
4. As soon as you turn your key to the ON position, you
will see the MIL symbol come on as part of a normal bulb
check.
5. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
a. The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
the ignition key or start the engine. This means that
your vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you
should not proceed to the I/M station.
b. The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition key or start
the engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD II
system is ready , and you can proceed to the I/M
station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
ready or not ready, if the MIL is illuminated during
normal vehicle operation, you should have your vehicle
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 383
serviced before going to the I/M station. The I/M station
can fail your vehicle because the MIL is on with the
engine running.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine Mopar威 parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to ensure the designed performance. Damage or failures
caused by the use of non-Mopar威 parts for maintenance
and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer’s
warranty.
WARNING!
AUTHORIZED DEALER SERVICE
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service manuals are
available which include detailed service information for
your vehicle. Refer to these Service manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
7
384 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
Besides the maintenance items for which there are fixed
maintenance intervals, there are other items that should
operate satisfactorily without periodic maintenance.
However, if a malfunction of these items does occur, it
could adversely affect the engine or vehicle performance.
These items should be inspected if a malfunction is
observed or suspected.
The best time to check the engine oil level is about five
minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off. Do not
check oil level before starting the engine after it has sat
overnight. Checking engine oil level when the engine is
cold will give you an incorrect reading.
ENGINE OIL
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop.
Engine Oil Dipstick
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 385
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground, will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain
the oil level between the MIN and MAX markings on the
dipstick. Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at
the MIN mark will result in a MAX reading on these
engines.
CAUTION!
Overfilling the crankcase as indicated by an oil level
above the “Max” mark on the engine oil dipstick will
cause oil aeration, which can lead to loss of oil
pressure and an increase in oil temperature. This
could damage your engine.
Change Engine Oil
Road conditions and your kind of driving affects the
interval at which your oil should be changed. Check the
following list to decide if any apply to you.
• Day and night temperatures are below 32°F (0°C).
• Stop and Go driving.
• Extensive engine idling.
• Driving in dusty conditions.
• Short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km).
• More than 50% of your driving is at sustained high
speeds during hot weather, above 90°F (32°C).
• Trailer towing.
• Taxi, Police or delivery service (commercial service).
• Off-Road or desert operation.
• If equipped for and operating with E-85 (ethanol)
fuel.
NOTE: If ANY of these apply to you then change your
engine oil every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or three months,
7
386 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
whichever comes first, and follow schedule “B—All
Engines” of the ⬙Maintenance Schedules⬙ section of this
manual.
If none of these apply to you, and your vehicle is
equipped with a Non–Turbo Charged Engine then
change your engine oil at every interval shown on
schedule “A”—NON TURBO in the maintenance schedule section of this manual.
If none of these apply to you, and your vehicle is
equipped with a Turbo Charged Engine change your
engine oil at every interval shown on schedule
“A”—TURBO in the maintenance schedule section of this
manual.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6000 miles (10 000 km) or 6 months
whichever comes first.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only
recommends engine oils that are API certified and meet
the requirements of DaimlerChrysler Material Standard
MS-6395.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). The
manufacturer only recommends
API Certified engine oils.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 387
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 2.4L and 2.4L
Turbo Engines
SAE 5W-30 engine oil is recommended for all operating
temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature
starting and vehicle fuel economy.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to the “Engine Compartment” illustration in this section.
Lubricants which do not have both, the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used.
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recommended oil quality requirements are met, and the recommended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes
are followed.
Materials Added To Engine Oils
The manufacture strongly recommends against the addition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to
the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and
it’s performance may be impaired by supplemental additives.
Disposing of Used Engine Oil
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil from
your vehicle. Used oil, indiscriminately discarded, can
present a problem to the environment. Contact your
dealer, service station, or governmental agency for advice
on how and where used oil can be safely discarded in
your area.
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced at every engine
oil change.
7
388 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Engine Oil Filter Selection
All of this manufacturers engines have a full-flow type
disposable oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to assure
most efficient service. Mopar Engine Oil Filters are high
quality oil filters and are recommended.
Special tools are required to properly measure tension
and to restore belt tension to factory specifications. Also,
check belt routing to make sure there is no interference
between the belts and other engine components.
DRIVE BELTS — CHECK CONDITION AND
TENSION
At the mileage shown in the maintenance schedules,
check all drive belts for condition and proper tension.
Improper belt tension can cause belt slippage and failure.
SPARK PLUGS
Spark plugs must fire properly to assure engine performance and emission control. New plugs should be installed at the specified mileage. The entire set should be
replaced if there is any malfunction due to a faulty spark
plug. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
this section for the proper type of spark plug for use in
your vehicle.
Inspect the drive belts for evidence of cuts, cracks, or
glazing and replace them if there is any sign of damage
which could result in belt failure. If adjustment is required, see your authorized dealer for service.
IGNITION WIRING SYSTEM
The ignition cables should be kept clean and properly
connected. Terminals should be fully seated. Cracked,
damaged, or faulty cables should be replaced.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 389
CATALYTIC CONVERTER
The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel
only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the
catalyst as an emission control device.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter will not require maintenance. However, it is important to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
CAUTION!
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In
the event of engine malfunction, particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and the
vehicle.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
7
390 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over
materials that can burn. Such materials might be
grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust
system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas
where your exhaust system can contact anything that
can burn.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune up to manufacturers specifications, should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalyst damage:
• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition
when the transaxle is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected for prolonged period.
ENGINE TIMING BELT
Replace the engine timing belt at the intervals described
in the appropriate maintenance schedule.
CRANKCASE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
Proper operation of this system depends on freedom
from sticking or plugging due to deposits. As vehicle
mileage builds up, the PCV valve and passages may
accumulate deposits. If a valve is not working properly,
replace it with a new valve. DO NOT ATTEMPT TO
CLEAN THE OLD PCV VALVE!
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 391
Check ventilation hose for indication of damage or
plugging deposits. Replace if necessary.
FUEL FILTER
A plugged fuel filter can cause hard starting or limit the
speed at which a vehicle can be driven. Should an
excessive amount of dirt accumulate in the fuel tank,
frequent filter replacement may be necessary. The fuel
filters are located inside the fuel tank. See your dealer for
service.
AIR CLEANER ELEMENT (AIR FILTER)
Under normal driving conditions, replace the filter at the
intervals shown on Schedule “A”. If, however, you drive
the vehicle frequently under dusty or severe conditions,
the filter element should be inspected periodically and
replaced if necessary at the intervals shown on Schedule
“B”.
NOTE: For vehicles with a Turbo engine, a small
amount of oil accumulation in the air cleaner box is
normal. The amount will depend on driving style. The air
cleaner box should be cleaned out and a new make-upair filter element should be installed during the normal
air filter maintenance procedure.
WARNING!
The air cleaner can provide a measure of protection
in the case of engine backfire. Do not remove the air
cleaner unless such removal is necessary for repair or
maintenance. Make sure that no one is near the
engine compartment before starting the vehicle with
the air cleaner removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
7
392 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
MAINTENANCE-FREE BATTERY
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic maintenance required.
CAUTION!
When servicing the battery, always reinstall the battery thermowrap. The thermowrap provides battery
heat protection and will extend overall battery life.
Failure to reinstall the thermowrap can result in
evaporative loss of the battery fluid.
WARNING!
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can burn
or even blind you. Don’t allow battery fluid to
contact your eyes, skin or clothing. Don’t lean over a
battery when attaching clamps. If acid splashes in
eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with
large amounts of water.
Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep flame
or sparks away from the battery. Don’t use a booster
battery or any other booster source with an output
greater than 12 volts. Don’t allow cable clamps to
touch each other.
Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after
handling.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 393
CAUTION!
It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to the
negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+)
and negative (-) and identified on the battery case.
Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts
and free of corrosion. Apply grease to posts and
clamps after tightening.
If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before
connecting the charger to battery. Do not use a “fast
charger” to provide starting voltage as battery damage can result.
AIR CONDITIONER MAINTENANCE
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an Authorized Dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
time.
7
394 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause
the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Section 3 of the Warranty Information book for
further warranty information.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced repairman.
Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. However, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by dealers or other service facilities
using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C System
Sealers, Stop Leak Products, Seal Conditioners, Compressor Oil, or Refrigerants.
POWER STEERING – FLUID CHECK
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined
service interval is not required. The fluid should only be
checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are
apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as anticipated. Coordinate inspection efforts through a certified
DaimlerChrysler Dealership.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 395
WARNING!
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
with the engine off to prevent injury from moving
parts and to insure accurate fluid level reading. Do
not overfill. Use only manufacturers recommended
power steering fluid.
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
surfaces. Refer to Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts
for correct fluid types.
FRONT SUSPENSION BALL JOINTS
There are two front suspension lower ball joints that are
permanently lubricated. Inspect these ball joints whenever under vehicle service is done. Damaged seals and
their corresponding potentially damaged ball joints must
be replaced.
STEERING LINKAGE
The tie rod end ball joints should be inspected for
external leakage and damage when other maintenance is
performed.
BODY LUBRICATION
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, doors, liftgate and hood hinges, should be
lubricated periodically to assure quiet, easy operation
and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned should be
wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating
excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular
attention should also be given to hood latching components to insure proper function. When performing other
underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism
and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the fall and spring. Apply a small
7
396 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
amount of a high quality lubricant such as Mopar威 Lock
Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild non abrasive cleaner or use the washer solvent. This
will remove accumulations of salt, waxes or road film
and help reduce streaking and smearing.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield. Avoid using the wiper blades to
remove frost or ice from the windshield. make sure that
they are not frozen to the glass before turning them on to
avoid damaging the blade. Keep the blade rubber out of
contact with petroleum products such as engine oil,
gasoline, etc.
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
1. Lift the wiper arm away from the glass.
2. Push the release tab shown in the illustration and slide
the wiper blade assembly down along the arm. Gently
place the wiper arm on the windshield.
3. Install the new blade assembly onto the wiper arm tip
until it locks in place.
NOTE: Always refer to the wiper blade packaging for
specific installation instructions. Many wiper blade replacements fit multiple vehicles.
WINDSHIELD WASHER RESERVOIR
NOTE: Always refer to the wiper blade packaging for
specific installation instructions. Many wiper blade replacements fit multiple vehicles.
The washer fluid reservoir is located in the rear of the
engine compartment on the passenger side and should be
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 397
checked for fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the
reservoir with windshield washer solvent (not radiator
antifreeze) and operate the system for a few seconds to
flush out the residual water.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
EXHAUST SYSTEM
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system,
or if exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle, or
when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have a competent technician inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the
exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for an oil
change or lubrication. Replace as required.
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO) which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer
to Exhaust Gas in the Safety Tips section of this
manual.
7
398 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
COOLING SYSTEM
WARNING!
• When working near the radiator cooling fan, disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition
switch to the OFF position. The fan is temperature
controlled and can start at any time the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
• You or others can be badly burned by hot coolant
or steam from your radiator. If you see or hear
steam coming from under the hood, don’t open the
hood until the radiator has had time to cool. Never
try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the
radiator is hot.
Coolant Checks
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If coolant is dirty or rusty in appearance, the
system should be drained, flushed and refilled with fresh
coolant. Check the front of the A/C condenser for any
accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently
spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the
face of the condenser.
Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts and tightness of the connection
at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for
leaks.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 399
Cooling System — Drain, Flush and Refill
The system should be drained, flushed, and refilled at the
intervals shown in the “Maintenance Schedules” in Section 8 of this manual.
If the solution is dirty or contains a considerable amount
of sediment, clean and flush with a reliable cooling
system cleaner. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove
all deposits and chemicals. Properly dispose of old
antifreeze solution.
Selection Of Coolant
Use only the manufacturers recommended coolant, refer
to Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct
coolant type.
CAUTION!
Mixing of coolants other than specified HOAT engine coolants, may result in engine damage and may
decrease corrosion protection. If a non-HOAT coolant
is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency, it should be replaced with the specified coolant as soon as possible.
Do not use plain water alone or alcohol base engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
This vehicle has not been designed for use with
Propylene Glycol based coolants. Use of Propylene
Glycol based coolants is not recommended.
7
400 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant that allows extended maintenance intervals. This
coolant can be used up to five Years or 100,000 miles
before replacement. To prevent reducing this extended
maintenance period, it is important that you use the same
coolant throughout the life of your vehicle. Please review
these recommendations for using Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) coolant.
When adding coolant:
• The manufacturer recommends using Mopar威
Antifreeze/Coolant five Year/100,000 Mile Formula
HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology).
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% HOAT engine coolant
and distilled water. Use higher concentrations (not to
exceed 70%) if temperatures below ⫺34° F (⫺37° C)
are anticipated.
• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
solution. The use of lower quality water will reduce
the amount of corrosion protection in the engine
cooling system.
Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to maintain the proper level of protection against freezing according to the temperatures occurring in the area where
the vehicle is operated.
NOTE: Mixing coolant types will decrease the life of the
engine coolant and will require more frequent coolant
changes.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of
coolant, and to insure that coolant will return to the
radiator from the coolant recovery bottle.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 401
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
WARNING!
• The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on
the cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution. Never add coolant when the engine is
overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to
cool an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to
build up in the cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while
the system is hot or under pressure.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine damage may result.
Disposal of Used Engine Coolant
Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant is a regulated
substance requiring proper disposal. Check with your
local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your
community. To prevent ingestion by humans and animals
do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant in open
containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the
ground. If ethylene glycol engine coolant is ingested by
anyone, contact a physician immediately. Clean up any
ground spills immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
engine idling, and warm to normal operating temperature, the level of the coolant in the bottle should be
between the ranges indicated on the bottle.
7
402 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for
coolant freeze point or replacing coolant. Advise your
service attendant of this. As long as the engine operating
temperature is satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only
be checked once a month.
When additional coolant is needed to maintain the
proper level, it should be added to the coolant bottle. Do
not overfill.
Points To Remember
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles (a
few kilometers) of operation, you may observe vapor
coming from the front of the engine compartment. This is
normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaporized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot coolant to
enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
• Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle.
• Check coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the
coolant recovery bottle. If antifreeze needs to be
added, contents of coolant recovery bottle must also be
protected against freezing.
• If frequent coolant additions are required, or if the
level in the coolant recovery bottle does not drop when
the engine cools, the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks.
• Maintain coolant concentration at 50% HOAT engine
coolant (minimum) and distilled water for proper
corrosion protection of your engine which contains
aluminum components.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 403
• Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery
bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean, also.
Pay particular attention to the hoses nearest to high heat
sources such as the exhaust manifold. Inspect hose routing to be sure hoses do not touch any heat source or
moving component that may cause heat damage or
mechanical wear.
• Do not change the thermostat for summer or winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
result in unsatisfactory coolant performance, poor gas
mileage, and increased emissions.
Insure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or
collapsed
HOSES AND VACUUM/VAPOR HARNESSES
Inspect surfaces of hoses and nylon tubing for evidence
of heat and mechanical damage. Hard or soft spots,
brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, abrasions, and excessive swelling indicate deterioration of the rubber
Components should be replaced immediately if there is
any evidence of degradation that could cause failure.
Inspect all hose connections such as clamps and couplings to make sure they are secure and no leaks are
present.
7
404 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FUEL SYSTEM CONNECTIONS
Electronic Fuel Injection high pressure fuel systems are
designed with tubes and special connects, connections
and clamps which have unique material characteristics to
provide adequate sealing and resist attack by deteriorated gasoline.
You are urged to use only the manufactures-specified
tubes, connections and clamps, or their equivalent in
material and specification, in any fuel system servicing.
BRAKE SYSTEM
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically.
Suggested service intervals can be found in the “Maintenance Schedule” in this manual.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly an accident. Driving with your foot resting
or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You wouldn’t have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
Brake, Power Steering and Oil Cooler System
Hoses
When servicing the vehicle for scheduled maintenance,
inspect the surface of the hoses and nylon tubing for
evidence of heat and mechanical damage. Hard and
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 405
brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, abrasions, and excessive swelling suggest deterioration of the rubber. Particular attention should be made to examining those hose
surfaces nearest to high heat sources, such as the exhaust
manifold.
Inspect all hose clamps and couplings to make sure they
are secure and no leaks are present.
Insure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or
collapsed.
NOTE: Often, fluids such as oil, power steering fluid,
and brake fluid are used during assembly plant operations to ease the assembly of hoses to couplings. Therefore, oil wetness at the hose-coupling area is not necessarily an indication of leakage. Actual dripping of hot
fluid when systems are under pressure (during vehicle
operation) should be noted before a hose is replaced
based on leakage.
NOTE: Inspection of brake hoses should be done whenever the brake system is serviced and at every engine oil
change. Inspect hydraulic brake hoses for surface cracking, scuffing, or worn spots. If there is any evidence of
cracking, scuffing, or worn spots, the hose should be
replaced immediately! Eventual deterioration of the hose
can take place resulting in a possibility of a burst failure.
WARNING!
Worn brake hoses can burst and cause brake failure.
You could have an accident. If you see any signs of
cracking, scuffing, or worn spots, have the brake
hoses replaced immediately.
7
406 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Master Cylinder - Brake Fluid Level Check
Check the fluid level in the master cylinder immediately
if the brake system warning light indicates system failure.
Check the fluid level in the master cylinder when performing underhood services.
Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing
the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the fluid level up
to the requirements described on the brake fluid reservoir.
Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may
cause leaking in the system.
Fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear.
Brake fluid level should be checked when pads are
replaced. However, low fluid level may be caused by a
leak and a checkup may be needed.
Use only manufacturers recommended brake fluid. Refer
to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” for the correct
fluid type.
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a Manual
transaxle , the Brake Fluid Reservoir supplies fluid to
both the Brake System and the Clutch Release System.
The two systems are separated in the reservoir and a leak
in one system will not affect the other system. The
Manual Transaxle Clutch Release System should not
require fluid replacement during the life of the vehicle. If
the Brake Fluid Reservoir is low, and the brake system
does not indicate any leaks or other problems, it may be
a result of a leak in the Hydraulic Clutch Release System.
See your local authorized dealer for service.
Use only manufacturers recommended brake fluid, refer
to Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid
type.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 407
WARNING!
WARNING!
Use of a brake fluid that has a lower initial boiling
point than the recommended MOPAR威 DOT 3 product or a brake fluid that is unidentified as to FMVSS
specification may result in sudden brake failure
during hard prolonged braking. You could have an
accident.
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the
brake fluid catching fire.
CAUTION!
Use of improper brake fluids will affect overall
clutch system performance. Improper brake fluids
may damage the clutch system resulting in loss of
clutch function and the ability to shift the transaxle.
Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed
container to avoid contamination from foreign matter.
CAUTION!
Do not allow petroleum base fluid to contaminate the
brake fluid, all brake seal components could be
damaged causing partial or complete brake failure.
7
408 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE
The automatic transaxle and differential assembly are
contained within a single housing.
The fluid level in the automatic transaxle should be
checked whenever the vehicle is serviced. Operation with
an improper fluid level will greatly reduce the life of the
transaxle and the fluid.
FLUID LEVEL CHECK — FOUR-CYLINDER
ENGINES
Use the following procedure to check the automatic
transaxle fluid level properly:
1. Park the vehicle on level ground.
2. Run the engine at curb idle speed for a minimum of 60
seconds.
3. Apply the parking brake fully.
4. Place the gear selector momentarily in each gear
position ending with the lever in “P” (Park).
5. Wipe the area around the dipstick clean to eliminate
the possibility of dirt entering the transaxle.
6. Remove the dipstick and determine if the fluid is hot
or cold. Hot fluid is approximately 180° F (82° C), which
is the normal operating temperature after the vehicle is
driven at least 15 miles (24 km). Hot fluid cannot be held
comfortably between the fingertips. Cold fluid is at a
temperature below 80°F (27°C).
7. Wipe the dipstick clean and reinsert until seated. Then,
remove dipstick and note the reading.
a. If the fluid is hot, the reading should be in the
crosshatched area marked “HOT” (between the upper
two holes in the dipstick).
b. If the fluid is cold, the fluid level should be between
the lower two holes in the area marked “COLD.”
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 409
If the fluid level is low, add sufficient fluid through the
filler (dipstick) tube to bring it to the proper level. Do not
overfill.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Automatic transmission fluid and filter should be
changed as follows:
CAUTION!
Maintenance schedule “A”—Non Turbo Charged Engines – No change necessary.
• Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in transmission shift quality and/or torque
converter shudder. Using a transmission fluid
other than that recommended by the manufacturer
will result in more frequent fluid and filter
changes. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” for the correct fluid type.
• Dirt and water in the transaxle can cause serious
damage. To prevent dirt and water from entering
the transaxle after checking or replenishing fluid,
make certain that the dipstick cap is re-seated
properly.
Maintenance schedule “A”—Turbo Charged Engines –
No change necessary.
Maintenance schedule “B”—All Engines – Every 60,000
miles (100 000 km) change fluid and filter under the
following conditions:
• Police, taxi, limousine, commercial type operation, or
trailer towing where the vehicle is driven regularly for
more than 45 minutes of continuous operation.
NOTE: Refer to Section 8 of this manual for maintenance schedules.
7
410 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
If the transaxle is disassembled for any reason, the fluid
and filter should be changed.
Special Additives
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered
product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the transaxle. The only exception to this policy is
the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid leaks. In
addition, avoid using transmission sealers as they may
adversely affect seals.
MANUAL TRANSAXLE
Lubricant Selection
Use only manufacturers recommended transmission
fluid. Refer to Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts for
the correct fluid type.
Fluid Level Check
Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug. The fluid
level should be between the bottom of the fill hole and a
point not more that 3/16” (4.7 mm) below the bottom of
the hole.
Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level.
Frequency Of Fluid Change
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
the factory will give satisfactory lubrication for the life of
the vehicle. Fluid changes are not necessary unless the
following conditions exist:
• The lubricant has become contaminated with water. If
contaminated with water, the fluid should be changed
immediately.
• If severe usage has occurred, refer to Maintenance
Schedule “B” in Section 8 of this manual.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 411
APPEARANCE CARE AND PROTECTION FROM
CORROSION
Protection Of Body And Paint from Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice, and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,
road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme
hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will
have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
• Stone and gravel impact.
• Insects, tree sap and tar.
• Salt in the air near sea coast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Washing
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle in the shade using Mopar威 Car Wash or a mild
car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with
clear water.
7
412 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumulated on your vehicle, use Mopar威 Super Kleen Bug
and Tar Remover to remove.
• Use Mopar威 Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains
and to protect your paint finish. Take care never to
scratch the paint.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint
finish.
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such
as steel wool or scouring powder, which will scratch
metal and painted surfaces.
Special Care
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
a month.
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors, rocker panels and trunk be kept clear and
open.
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
• If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or
similar cause which destroys the paint and protective
coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 413
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
cleaner. Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic
solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheels’
protective finish.
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
Interior Care
• Use Mopar touch up paint on scratches as soon as
possible. Your dealer has touch up paint to match the
color of your vehicle.
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a
mild soap and water to prevent corrosion. To remove
heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use Mopar威
Wheel Cleaner (05066247AB) or equivalent or select a
nonabrasive, non-acidic cleaner. Do not use scouring
pads, steel wool, a bristle brush, or metal polishes. Only
Mopar威 or equivalent is recommended. Do not use oven
Instrument Panel Cover
The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface,
which minimizes reflections in the windshield. Do not
use protectants or other products, which may cause
undesirable reflections. Use soap and warm water to
restore the low glare surface.
Cleaning Interior Trim
Interior Trim should be cleaned starting with a damp
cloth, a damp cloth with Mopar威 Total Clean, then
Mopar威 Spot & Stain Remover if absolutely necessary. Do
not use harsh cleaners or Armorall. Use Mopar威 Total
Clean to clean vinyl upholstery
7
414 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cleaning Leather Upholstery
Mopar威 Total Clean is specifically recommended for
leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
and Mopar威 Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid
soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please
do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather
upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not
required to maintain the original condition.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
YES Essentials威 Fabric Cleaning Procedure – If
Equipped
YES Essentials威 seats may be cleaned in the following
manner:
• Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
with a clean, dry towel.
• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
• For tough stains, apply Mopar威 Total Clean or a mild
soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain.
Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 415
• For grease stains, apply Mopar威 Multi-Purpose
Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use
a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
• Do not use any solvents or protectants on Yes Essentials威 products.
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and
less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with Mopar Glass Cleaner or any commercial householdtype glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type cleaner.
Use caution when cleaning the inside rear window
equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear quarter
window equipped with the radio antenna. Do not use
scrapers or other sharp instruments which may scratch
the elements. When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray
cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using. Do not
spray cleaner directly on the mirror.
Instrument Panel Cover
The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface which
minimizes reflections in the windshield. Do not use
protectants or other products which may cause undesirable reflections. Use soap and warm water to restore the
low glare surface.
7
416 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
rag.
CONVERTIBLE TOP CARE
Immediate removal of any contaminant is recommended.
Regular washing of the top will enhance its life and
appearance, and make successive cleanings easier. Do not
subject the top to excessive heat. Frequently vacuum the
top and storage compartment.
2. Dry with a soft tissue.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the car to
wash them.
Dry with a soft tissue.
Washing
Hand washing is highly recommended. Automatic car
washing equipment can damage the top material. If you
must use an automatic car wash, soft cloth systems are
preferred.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 417
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
Avoid high pressure car washes, as they can damage
the top material. Also, increased water pressure may
force water past the weather strips.
Never use an abrasive type cleaner or bleaches.
Cleaners should not contain silicones, organic solvents, petroleum distillates or plasticizers. always
wait until the top is thoroughly dry before lowering
it into the storage area.
General Cleaning
Careful vacuuming of the top before washing is helpful
in removing dust and other foreign particles. Wash in
partial shade instead of direct sun. Wet the entire vehicle
before washing the top. The top should be washed with
a soft, natural bristle scrub brush, and Mopar Car Wash
or a mild soap solution. Do not use detergent.
Scrub in all directions, covering an area of about two
square feet at a time. Avoid heavy scrubbing. Rinse the
entire vehicle with water to remove all soap and dirt from
the top fabric and to prevent streaking on painted and
chrome surfaces. Allow the top to dry before lowering.
Vacuuming the top with a wet/dry shop vacuum will
decrease the top’s drying time, ensure removal of all dirt,
and delete streaks in the material. Multiple cleanings may
be necessary to remove stubborn stains. If stains persist,
contact your local dealership for further suggestions.
7
418 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cloth Top Additional Cleaning Procedure
For additional cleaning assistance in removing stubborn
stains, apply Mopar Convertible Cloth Top Cleaner (part
number 05012245AA) to the complete stain, extending 2
inches (50 mm) beyond the stain. With a soft bristle
brush, scrub in all directions over the stain. Avoid heavy
scrubbing. Rinse the area with warm water. If the stain is
still apparent, repeat the cleaning procedure. When the
stain is no longer showing, rinse the complete top with
warm water. Let the top dry before lowering it. 7
Cloth Top Protection
For appearance purposes, you may wish to protect your
Twillfast™ (cloth) top periodically. Use Mopar Convertible Cloth Top Treatment or a fabric protectant such as
Scotchguard_ is suggested. The top should be clean and
dry before application of the protectant.
CAUTION!
Avoid getting Scotchguard_ on the surrounding
weather strips, moldings, paint, or glass. Damage to
these items might occur.
Weather Strip Care
Lubricate all top and door glass weather strips periodically with Mopar Weather Strip Lubricant (part number
4773427), to keep them soft and pliable.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 419
INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (IPM)
An Integrated Power Module is located in the engine
compartment near the air cleaner assembly. This center
contains cartridge fuses and mini fuses. A description of
each fuse and component may be stamped on the inside
of the cover.
1
2
3
4
5
Integrated Power Module Location
INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (IPM)
Cartridge
Cavity
Mini Fuse Description
Fuse
Power Top
40 Amp
Feed —
Green
Convertible
Only
20 Amp Yel- AWD ECU
low
Feed
CHMSL
10 Amp Red Brake
Switch Feed
Ignition
10 Amp Red
Switch Feed
20 Amp YelTrailer Tow
low
7
420 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
6
7
8
9
10
11
INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (IPM)
Cartridge
Cavity
Mini Fuse Description
Fuse
IOD Sw/
Pwr Mir/
10 Amp Red Ocm Steering Cntrl
Sdar/Hfm
30 Amp
IOD Sense1
Green
30 Amp
IOD Sense2
Green
40 Amp
Power Seats
Green
CCN,
20 Amp YelPower
low
Locks
15 Amp Lt Power OutBlue
let
12
13
14
15
16
INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (IPM)
Cartridge
Cavity
Mini Fuse Description
Fuse
20 Amp Yel- Ign Run/
low
Acc Inverter
Pwr run/
20 Amp YelAcc Outlet
low
RR
IOD CCN/
10 Amp Red Interior
Lighting
RAD Fan
50 Amp Red
Relay Battery Feed
IGN Run/
15 Amp Lt.
Acc Cigar
Blue
Ltr/Sunroof
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 421
17
18
19
20
21
INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (IPM)
Cartridge
Cavity
Mini Fuse Description
Fuse
IOD Feed
10 Amp Red CVT Mod/
Mod_Wcm
ASD Relay
40 Amp
Contact
Green
PWR Feed
PWR Amp
20 Amp
1 & Amp 2
Yelow
Feed
15 Amp Lt. IOD Feed
Blue
Radio
IOD Feed
10 Amp Red Intrus
Mod/Siren
22
23
24
25
26
INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (IPM)
Cartridge
Cavity
Mini Fuse Description
Fuse
IGN RUN
Hvac/
10 Amp Red
Compass
Sensor
ENG ASD
15 Amp Lt.
Relay Feed
Blue
3
25 Amp
PWR SunNatural
roof Feed
Heated Mir10 Amp Red
ror
ENG ASD
15 Amp Lt.
Relay Feed
Blue
2
7
422 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
27
28
29
30
31
32
INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (IPM)
Cartridge
Cavity
Mini Fuse Description
Fuse
IGN RUN
10 Amp Red Only ORC
Feed
IGN RUN
10 Amp Red ORC/OCM
Feed
EMPTY
20 Amp Yel- Heated
low
Seats
Headlamp
10 Amp Red Washer Relay Control
ENG ASD
30 Amp
Control
Pink
Feed 1
33
34
35
36
37
INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (IPM)
Cartridge
Cavity
Mini Fuse Description
Fuse
ABS MOD/
10 Amp Red J1962
Conn/PCM
30 Amp
ABS Valve
Pink
Feed
40 Amp
ABS Pump
Green
Feed
Headlamp
30 Amp
Washer
Pink
Control
25 Amp
Spare
Natural
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 423
CAUTION!
• When installing the Integrated Power Module
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so
may allow water to get into the Integrated Power
Module, and possibly result in a electrical system
failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to
use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating.
The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated
may result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it
indicates a problem in the circuit that must be
corrected.
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you will not be using your vehicle for more than 21
days, you may want to take steps to preserve your
battery. You may:
• Disengage the mini-fuse in the Power Distribution
Center labeled IOD (Ignition Off-Draw).
• Or, disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
7
424 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
REPLACEMENT BULBS
LIGHT BULBS — Inside
Bulb No.
Center Console Floor Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T37
Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6233137
Console Gear Selector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PC194
Dome Light (sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T579
Dome Light / Sport Bar Lights (convertible) . . . . T904
Instrument Cluster Illumination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Overhead Reading Light (Overhead Console) . . . T1037
Overhead Reading Light (Rearview Mirror) . . . . . T192
Rear Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T906
Visor Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6501966
All the inside bulbs are brass or glass wedge base.
Aluminum base bulbs are not approved and should not
be used for replacement.
LIGHTS BULBS — Outside
Bulb No.
Low Beam Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9006XS
High Beam Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9005XS
Front Park/Turn Signal/Side Marker
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4157NAKX
Front Fog Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9145
Center High Mounted Stop Light
(CHMSL) (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 921–W16W
Center High Mounted Stop Light
(CHMSL) (Convertible). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED
Rear Tail/Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3157
Rear Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3757A
Backup Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3157-P27/7W
License Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 425
BULB REPLACEMENT
Headlights
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new headlight bulb with your
fingers. Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb
life.
1. Remove the headlight access cover splash shield,
located in the front wheel well opening.
2. Disconnect the electrical connector.
3. Rotate the socket to the left one quarter turn and
replace the bulb.
7
426 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Front Park/Turn Signal/Side Marker Lights
Front Fog Lights — If Equipped
1. Remove the headlight access cover splash shield,
located in the front wheel well opening.
1. Remove the fasteners attaching the lower splash
shield to gain access to the fog light.
2. Rotate the socket to the left one quarter turn to replace
and replace the bulb.
2. Twist and remove the bulb from the fog light housing.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector and replace bulb.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 427
Tail/Stop, and Rear Turn Signal Lights
3. Pull the bulb out of the socket and replace.
1. Remove the screw attaching the tail light housing and
remove the housing from the vehicle.
Back Up Lights
2. Twist the bulb socket 1/4 turn to remove it from the
housing.
7
Removing Backup Light Bulbs
428 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
1. To remove the backup lamp, you must take a fiber
stick and slide it along the inboard side of the lamp and
compress a spring clip to allow it to partially ⬙pop⬙ out to
the secondary catch.
2. Fully compress the clip to get the lamp to come out
completely.
3. Remove the socket from the housing.
4. Pull the bulb out of the socket and replace.
Center High Mounted Stop Light
1. Open the liftgate and remove the liftgate CHMSL
cover.
2. Remove CHMSL lens from the housing by unlatching
the two side latches.
3. Pull the bulb out of the socket and replace.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 429
FLUIDS AND CAPACITIES
FLUIDS AND CAPACITIES
U.S.
15 Gallons
Fuel (Approximate)
Engine Oil-With Filter
2.4 Liter Engines (Use API Certified
5.0 qts
SAE 5W-30 Engine Oil.)
Cooling System *
2.4 Liter Engines (Mopar威
Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000
6.5 qts
Miles Formula), or equivalent.
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
Metric
56.7 Liters
4.7 Liters
6.2 Liters
7
430 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS
ENGINE
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts
Mopar威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile ForEngine Coolant
mula HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology) or
equivalent.
Use API Certified SAE 5W-30 Engine Oil. Refer to your
Engine Oil (2.4L Standard, 2.4L Standard Turbo)
engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade meeting
DaimlerChrysler Material Standard MS-6395.
Non Turbo—Mopar威 4105409AB or equiv.
Engine Oil Filter
Turbo—Mopar威 4781452BB or equiv.
2.4L Non Turbo — Champion威 RE16MC, 040” Gap 2.4L
Spark Plugs
Turbo — Champion威 RE14MCC5,.050” Gap.
87 Octane for 2.4L Standard Turbo and 2.4L Standard
Fuel Selection
Non Turbo Engines.
Component
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 431
CHASSIS
Component
Automatic Transmission Fluid
Manual Transmission Fluid
Brake Master Cylinder
Power Steering Reservoir
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts.
Mopar威 ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Mopar威 ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid MS9602.
Mopar威 DOT 3, SAE J1703 should be used. If DOT 3,
SAE J1703 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is
acceptable. Use only recommended brake fluids or
equivalent.
Mopar威 Power Steering Fluid +4 or Mopar威 ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.
7
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
CONTENTS
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
䡵 Emissions Control System Maintenance . . . . . . . 434
▫ Schedule “A”—Non Turbo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
䡵 Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
▫ Schedule “A”—Turbo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453 C
▫ Schedule “B”—All Engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
S
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
434 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
EMISSIONS CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in bold type
must be done at the times or mileages specified to ensure
the continued proper functioning of the emission control
system. These, and all other maintenance services included in this manual, should be done to provide best
vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent mainS tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating
C conditions, such as dusty areas and very short trip
H driving.
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Inspection and service should also be done any time a
malfunction is suspected.
NOTE: Maintenance, replacement, or repair of the emissions control devices and systems on your vehicle may be
performed by any automotive repair establishment or
individual using any automotive part that has been
certified pursuant to U.S. EPA or, in the State of California, California Air Resources Board regulations.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
There are three maintenance schedules that show required service for your vehicle.
First is Schedule “B”—ALL ENGINES. It is for vehicles
that are operated under the conditions that are listed
below and at the beginning of the schedule.
• Day and night temperatures are below 32° F (0° C).
• Stop and go driving.
• Extensive engine idling.
• Driving in dusty conditions.
• Short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km).
• More than 50% of your driving is at sustained high
speeds during hot weather, above 90° F (32° C).
• Trailer towing.†〫
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 435 M
• Taxi, police, or delivery service (commercial service).†〫
• Off-road or desert operation.
• If equipped for and operating with E-85 (ethanol)
fuel.
NOTE: If ANY of these apply to you then change your
engine oil every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months,
whichever comes first, and follow schedule “B—All
Engines” of the ⬙Maintenance Schedules⬙ section of this
manual.
NOTE: IF ANY of these apply to you then flush and
replace the engine coolant every 102,000 miles (170 000
km) or 60 months, whichever comes first, and follow
schedule “B—All Engines” of the ⬙Maintenance Schedules⬙ section of this manual.
NOTE: Most vehicles are operated under the conditions
listed for Schedule ⬙B⬙—ALL ENGINES.
A
I
N
T
E
N
Third is Schedule “A”—TURBO. It is for vehicles that are A
not operated under any of the conditions listed under N
C
Schedule ⬙B⬙—ALL ENGINES.
E
Second is Schedule “A”—NON TURBO. It is for vehicles
that are not operated under any of the conditions listed
under Schedule ⬙B⬙—ALL ENGINES.
Use the schedule that best describes your driving condi- S
tions. Where time and mileage are listed, follow the C
H
interval that occurs first.
CAUTION!
Failure to perform the required maintenance items
may result in damage to the vehicle.
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 436 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I At Each Stop for Fuel
N
T • Check the engine oil level about 5 minutes after a fully
E
warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil level while
N
A
the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuN
racy of the oil level reading. Add oil only when the
C
level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark.
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
• Check the windshield washer solvent and add if
required.
• Check all lights and all other electrical items for correct
operation.
• Check rubber seals on each side of the radiator for
proper fit.
At Each Oil Change
• Change the engine oil filter.
• Inspect the exhaust system.
Once a Month
• Inspect the brake hoses.
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage.
• Inspect the CV joints and front suspension components.
• Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals
as required.
• Check the automatic transaxle fluid level.
• Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir, brake
master cylinder and transaxle and add as needed.
• Check the manual transaxle fluid level and fill plug
condition.
• Check the coolant level, hoses, and clamps.
SCHEDULE “B”—ALL ENGINES 437 M
SCHEDULE “B”—ALL ENGINES
Follow schedule “B”—All Engines if you usually operate
your vehicle under one or more of the following conditions.
Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter every
60,000 miles (100 000 km) if the vehicle is usually
operated under one or more of the conditions marked
with an 〫.
Change the manual transaxle fluid every 48,000 miles (80
000 km) if the vehicle is usually operated under one or
more of the conditions marked with an †.
• Day and night temperatures are below 32° F (0° C).
• Stop and go driving.
• Extensive engine idling.
• Driving in dusty conditions.
A
I
N
• More than 50% of your driving is at sustained high T
E
speeds during hot weather, above 90° F (32° C).
N
A
• Trailer towing.†〫
N
C
• Taxi, police, or delivery service (commercial ser- E
• Short trips of less than 10 miles (16.2 km).
vice).†〫
S
C
H
• If equipped for and operating with E-85 (ethanol) E
D
fuel.
U
NOTE: If ANY of these apply to you then change your L
E
engine oil every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months, S
• Off-road or desert operation.
whichever comes first, and follow schedule “B—All
Engines” of the ⬙Maintenance Schedules⬙ section of this
manual.
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
438 SCHEDULE “B”—ALL ENGINES
NOTE: IF ANY of these apply to you then flush and
replace the engine coolant every 102,000 miles (170 000
km) or 60 months, whichever comes first, and follow
schedule “B—All Engines” of the ⬙Maintenance Schedules⬙ section of this manual.
If none of these apply to you, and your vehicle is
equipped with a Non–Turbo Charged Engine then
S change your engine oil at every interval shown on
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
schedule “A”—NON TURBO in the maintenance schedule section of this manual.
If none of these apply to you, and your vehicle is
equipped with a Turbo Charged Engine change your
engine oil at every interval shown on schedule
“A”—TURBO in the maintenance schedule section of this
manual.
SCHEDULE “B”—ALL ENGINES 439 M
Miles
(Kilometers)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter, if not
replaced at 3 months.
Rotate tires.
Inspect the brake linings.
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter, replace as
necessary.*
Inspect the Make-up air filter, replace as necessary.
3,000
(5 000)
X
6,000
(10 000)
X
X
9,000
(15 000)
X
12,000
(20 000)
X
15,000
(25 000)
X
X
X
18,000
(30 000)
X
X
X
X
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 440 SCHEDULE “B”—ALL ENGINES
A
I
N Miles
T (Kilometers)
E
N Change engine oil and engine oil filter, if not
A replaced at 3 months.
N
C Rotate tires.
E Inspect the brake linings.
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
Replace the spark plugs.
Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals.
Inspect the PCV valve and replace as necessary.*
Replace the Make-up air filter.
Adjust the generator drive belt tension.
21,000
(35 000)
X
24,000
(40 000)
X
X
X
27,000
(45 000)
X
30,000
(50 000)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
33,000
(55 000)
X
36,000
(60 000)
X
X
X
SCHEDULE “B”—ALL ENGINES 441 M
Miles
(Kilometers)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter, if not
replaced at 3 months.
Rotate tires.
Inspect the brake linings.
Change the brake fluid. If vehicle is used for
trailer towing.
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter, replace as
necessary.*
Change the manual transaxle fluid.†
Inspect the Make-up air filter. Replace as necessary.
39,000
(65 000)
X
42,000
(70 000)
X
45,000
(75 000)
X
X
48,000
(80 000)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
51,000
(85 000)
X
54,000
(90 000)
X
X
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 442 SCHEDULE “B”—ALL ENGINES
A
I
N Miles
T (Kilometers)
E
N Change engine oil and engine oil filter, if not
A replaced at 3 months.
N
C Rotate tires.
E Inspect the brake linings.
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
Replace the spark plugs and ignition cables.
Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals.
Inspect the PCV valve and replace if necessary. Not required if previously changed. * ‡
Replace the Make-up air filter.
Adjust the generator drive belt tension.
Change the automatic transaxle fluid and filter.〫
Flush and replace engine coolant at 60
months, if not done at 102,000 miles.
57,000
(95 000)
X
60,000
63,000
66,000
69,000
(100 000) (105 000) (110 000) (115 000)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
72,000
(120 000)
X
X
X
SCHEDULE “B”—ALL ENGINES 443 M
Miles
(Kilometers)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter, if not
replaced at 3 months.
Rotate tires.
Inspect the brake linings.
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter and replace as necessary.*
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
Replace the spark plugs.
Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals.
Inspect the PCV valve and replace if necessary. Not required if previously changed. * ‡
Inspect the Make-up air filter, replace as necessary.
Adjust the generator drive belt tension.
Replace the Make-up air filter.
75,000
78,000
81,000
84,000
87,000
(125 000) (130 000) (135 000) (140 000) (145 000)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
90,000
(150 000)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
X
X
X
M 444 SCHEDULE “B”—ALL ENGINES
A
I
N Miles
T (Kilometers)
E
N Change engine oil and engine oil filter, if not reA placed at 3 months.
N
C Rotate tires.
E Inspect the brake linings.
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Change the brake fluid. If vehicle is used for trailer
towing.
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter and replace as
necessary.*
Change the manual transaxle fluid.†
Replace the engine timing belt. *
Flush and replace the engine coolant, if not replaced
at 60 months.
Inspect the Make-up air filter, replace as necessary.
93,000
(155 000)
X
96,000
(160 000)
X
X
X
X
99,000
(165 000)
X
102,000
(170 000)
X
105,000
(175 000)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
SCHEDULE “B”—ALL ENGINES 445 M
Miles
(Kilometers)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter, if not replaced at 3 months.
Rotate tires.
Inspect the brake linings.
Replace the engine air cleaner filter. *
Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals.
Replace the Make-up air filter.
Adjust the generator drive belt tension.
Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter.〫
Inspect the PCV valve and replace if necessary. *‡
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 120 months,
if not replaced at 102,000 miles.
Replace the spark plugs and ignition cables.
108,000
(180 000)
X
X
111,000
(185 000)
X
114,000
(190 000)
X
X
X
117,000
(195 000)
X
120,000
(200 000)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 446 SCHEDULE “B”—ALL ENGINES
A
I
N Miles
T (Kilometers)
E
N Change engine oil and engine oil filter, if not reA placed at 3 months.
N
C Rotate tires.
E Inspect the brake linings.
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter and replace as
necessary.*
123,000
(205 000)
X
X
126,000
(210 000)
X
129,000
(215 000)
X
X
X
132,000
(220 000)
X
135,000
(225 000)
X
X
X
SCHEDULE “B”—ALL ENGINES 447 M
Miles
(Kilometers)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter, if not replaced at 3 months.
Rotate tires.
Inspect the brake linings.
Replace the engine air cleaner filter. *
Replace the spark plugs.
Change the manual transaxle fluid.†
Replace the Make-up air filter.
Inspect the PCV valve and replace if necessary. *‡
138,000
(230 000)
X
* This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer
to the owner, but is not required to maintain the emissions warranty.
‡ This maintenance is not required if previously replaced.
† This maintenance is required only for police, taxi,
limousine type operation, or trailer towing.
X
141,000
(235 000)
X
144,000
(240 000)
X
147,000
(245 000)
X
X
150,000
(250 000)
X
X
X
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
X
X
S
C
H
X
E
X
D
U
X
L
〫 This maintenance is required only for police, taxi, E
S
limousine type operation, or trailer towing.
Inspection and service should also be performed anytime
a malfunction is observed or suspected. Retain all receipts.
8
M 448 SCHEDULE “A”—NON TURBO
A
I SCHEDULE “A”—NON TURBO
N
T Miles
E
N (Kilometers)
A [Months]
N
C Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
E Rotate tires.
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Inspect the brake linings.
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
Replace the spark plugs.
Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals.
Replace the Make-up air filter.
Adjust the generator drive belt tension
6,000
(10 000)
[6]
X
X
12,000
(20 000)
[12]
X
X
18,000
(30 000)
[18]
X
X
X
24,000
(40 000)
[24]
X
X
30,000
(50 000)
[30]
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
36,000
(60 000)
[36]
X
X
X
SCHEDULE “A”—NON TURBO 449 M
Miles
(Kilometers)
[Months]
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate tires.
Inspect the brake linings.
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
Replace the spark plugs and ignition cables.
Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals.
Inspect the PCV valve and replace, if necessary.*
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 60 months, if
not done at 102,000 miles.
Replace the Make-up air filter.
Adjust the generator drive belt tension.
42,000
(70 000)
[42]
X
X
48,000
(80 000)
[48]
X
X
54,000
(90 000)
[54]
X
X
X
60,000
(100 000)
[60]
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
66,000
(110 000)
[66]
X
X
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 450 SCHEDULE “A”—NON TURBO
A
I
N Miles
T (Kilometers)
E
N [Months]
A Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
N
C Rotate tires.
E Inspect the brake linings.
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
Replace the spark plugs.
Replace the engine timing belt. *
Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals.
Inspect the PCV valve and replace if necessary.
Not required if previously changed. * ‡
Replace the Make-up air filter.
Adjust the generator drive belt tension.
Flush and replace the engine coolant, if not replaced at 60 months.
72,000
78,000
84,000
90,000
96,000
102,000
(120 000) (130 000) (140 000) (150 000) (160 000) (170 000)
[72]
[78]
[84]
[90]
[96]
[102]
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
SCHEDULE “A”—NON TURBO 451 M
Miles
108,000 114,000 120,000 126,000 132,000 138,000
(Kilometers)
(180 000) (190 000) (200 000) (210 000) (220 000) (230 000)
[Months]
[108]
[114]
[120]
[126]
[132]
[138]
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
X
X
X
X
X
X
Rotate tires.
X
X
X
X
X
X
Inspect the PCV valve and replace if necessary. * ‡
X
Replace the air cleaner filter.
X
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 120
X
months, if not done at 102,000 miles.
Replace the spark plugs and ignition cables.
X
Replace the Make-up air filter.
X
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 452 SCHEDULE “A”—NON TURBO
A
I
N Miles
T (Kilometers)
E
N [Months]
A Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
N
C Rotate tires.
E Inspect the PCV valve and replace if necessary. * ‡
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Replace the air cleaner filter.
* This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer
to the owner but is not required to maintain the emissions warranty.
‡ This maintenance is not required if previously replaced.
144,000
(240 000)
[144]
X
X
150,000
(250 000)
[150]
X
X
X
X
Inspection and service should also be performed anytime
a malfunction is observed or suspected. Retain all receipts.
SCHEDULE “A”—TURBO 453 M
SCHEDULE “A”—TURBO
Miles
(Kilometers)
[Months]
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate tires.
Inspect the brake linings.
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
Replace the spark plugs.
Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals.
Replace the Make-up air filter.
Adjust the generator drive belt tension.
5,000
(8 000)
[6]
X
X
10,000
(16 000)
[12]
X
X
15,000
(24 000)
[18]
X
X
20,000
(32 000)
[24]
X
X
X
25,000
(40 000)
[30]
X
X
30,000
(48 000)
[36]
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 454 SCHEDULE “A”—TURBO
A
I
N Miles
T (Kilometers)
E
N [Months]
A Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
N
C Rotate tires.
E Inspect the brake linings.
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Flush and replace engine coolant at 60 months, if not
replaced at 100,000 miles.
35,000
(56 000)
[42]
X
X
40,000
(64 000)
[48]
X
X
X
45,000
(72 000)
[54]
X
X
50,000
(80 000)
[60]
X
X
X
55,000
(88 000)
[66]
X
X
SCHEDULE “A”—TURBO 455 M
Miles
(Kilometers)
[Months]
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate tires.
Inspect the brake linings.
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
Replace the spark plugs and ignition cables.
Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals.
Inspect the PCV valve and replace if necessary.
Not required if previously changed. * ‡
Replace the Make-up air filter.
Adjust the generator drive belt tension.
60,000
(96 000)
[72]
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
65,000
70,000
75,000
80,000
85,000
(104 000) (112 000) (120 000) (128 000) (136 000)
[78]
[84]
[90]
[96]
[102]
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 456 SCHEDULE “A”—TURBO
A
I
N Miles
T (Kilometers)
E
N [Months]
A Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
N
C Rotate tires.
E Inspect the brake linings.
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
Replace the spark plugs.
Adjust the generator drive belt tension.
Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals.
Inspect the PCV valve and replace if necessary. Not required if
previously changed. * ‡
Flush and replace the engine coolant if not done at 60 months.
Replace the Make-up air filter.
Replace the engine timing belt.
90,000
(144 000)
[108]
X
X
95,000
(156 000)
[114]
X
X
100,000
(160 000)
[120]
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
105,000
(168 000)
[126]
X
X
SCHEDULE “A”—TURBO 457 M
Miles
(Kilometers)
[Month]
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate tires.
Inspect the PCV Valve and replace if necessary. *
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
Replace the spark plugs and ignition cables.
* This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer
to the owner but is not required to maintain the emissions warranty.
‡ This maintenance is not required if previously replaced.
Inspection and service should also be performed anytime
a malfunction is observed or suspected. Retain all receipts.
110,000
(177 000)
[132]
X
X
115,000
(185 000)
[138]
X
X
120,000
(193 000)
[144]
X
X
X
X
X
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which
you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
▫ In Mexico Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
▫ Prepare For The Appointment . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
䡵 Warranty Information (U.S. Vehicles Only) . . . . . 464
䡵 If You Need Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
䡵 Mopar威 Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
▫ DaimlerChrysler Motors Corporation Customer
Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
䡵 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
▫ DaimlerChrysler Canada Inc. Customer
Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
▫ In The 50 United States And Washington,
D.C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
9
460 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
䡵 Publication Order Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
䡵 Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire
Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
▫ Temperature Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
▫ Treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 461
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you’re having warranty work done, be sure to have the
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the
current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
for an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
We strongly recommend that you take your vehicle to
your authorized selling dealer. They know you and your
vehicle best, and are most concerned that you get prompt
and high quality service. The manufacturer’s authorized
dealers have the facilities, factory-trained technicians,
9
462 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
special tools, and the latest information to ensure your
vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to your authorized
dealer’s service manager first. Most matters can be resolved with this process.
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the authorized dealership. They want to know if you need assistance.
• If your authorized dealership is unable to resolve the
concern, you may contact the Manufacturer’s Customer Center.
Any communication to the Manufacturer’s Customer
Center should include the following information:
• Owner’s name and address
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
• Authorized dealership name
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
DaimlerChrysler Motors Corporation Customer
Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (800) 992-1997
DaimlerChrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465–2001
In Mexico contact:
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico: (915) 729–1248 or 729–1240
Outside Mexico: (525) 729–1248 or 729–1240
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 463
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its Customer
Center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for your
vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after your manufacturer’s New Vehicle
Limited Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer’s Service Contracts. If you
purchased a manufacturer’s Service Contract, you will
receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card
in the mail within three weeks of your vehicle delivery
date. If you have any questions about your service
contract, call the manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922.
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s Service Contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s Service Contract. If you purchased a
service contract that is not a manufacturer’s Service
Contract, and you require service after your manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer
to your contract documents, and contact the person listed
in those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased your vehicle. Your authorized
dealer has also made a major investment in facilities,
tools, and training to assure that you are absolutely
delighted with your ownership experience. You’ll be
pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty
issues or related concerns.
9
464 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
WARNING!
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm. In addition,
certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION (U.S. Vehicles Only)
See the Warranty Information Booklet for the terms and
provisions of DaimlerChrysler’s warranties applicable to
this vehicle.
MOPAR姞 PARTS
Mopar威 fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
available from your authorized dealer. They will help
you keep your vehicle operating at its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the
manufacturer.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your authorized
dealer, and the manufacturer.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 465
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424– 9153),
or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, D.C.
20590. You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mastercard, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department immediately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should write to:
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations
and Recalls, 2780 Sheffield Road, Ottawa, Ontario K1B
3V9.
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
• Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the
information that students and professional technicians
need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving,
maintaining, servicing, and repairing DaimlerChrysler
Corporation vehicles. A complete working knowledge
of the vehicle, system, and/or components is written
in straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
9
466 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
• Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals make it easy for students and technicians
to find and fix problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and features. They show exactly how to
find and correct problems the first time, using step-bystep troubleshooting and drivability procedures,
proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools
and equipment.
• Owner’s Manuals
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to
acquaint you with specific DaimlerChrysler
Corporation vehicles. Included are starting, operating,
emergency and maintenance procedures as well as
specifications, capabilities and safety tips.
Call toll free at:
• 1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)
• 1–800–387–1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
• www.techauthority.daimlerchrysler.com
• www.daimlerchrysler.ca/manuals
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 467
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety
requirements in addition to these grades.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear 1-1/2 times as
well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The
relative performance of tires depends upon the actual
conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits,
service practices, and differences in road characteristics
and climate.
Traction Grades
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
9
468 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
INDEX
10
470 INDEX
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . 400
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . 391
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Air Conditioning Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393,394
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277,393
Air Pressure, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55,90
Airbag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67,101
Airbag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70,104,116,234
Airbag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68,103
Airbag, Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64,100
Alarm, Panic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26,32
Alarm System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . 36,233
Alignment and Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Antenna, Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . 399,400,429,430
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Anti-Theft Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . 36
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13,291,294,408
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Interlock System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19,295
Reset Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
INDEX 471
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Back-Up Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Ball Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . 29,35
Belts, Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Belts, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Boot, Convertible Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128,132
B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Brake, Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307,404
Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307,404
Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle . . . . . . . 115
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424,425
Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Calibration, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238,247,248
Capacities, Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . 429
Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Caps, Filler
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378,379,387
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
10
472 INDEX
Cargo Compartment
Luggage Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Carrier, Luggage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Catalytic Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Caution, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
CD (Compact Disc) Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251,259
CD (Compact Disc) Player Maintenance . . . . . . . . 277
Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138,277
Center High Mounted Stop Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator
Light) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72,107
Child Restraint Tether Anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . 77,111
Child Restraint with Automatic Belts . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Child Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78,112
Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Cleaning
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250,253,261
Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Clutch Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Coin Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234,235,238,248
Compass Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238,247,248
Compass Variance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Computer, Trip/Travel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234,235
Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
Convertible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Convertible Boot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128,132
Convertible Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
INDEX 473
Convertible Top Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Convertible Top Manual Override . . . . . . . . . 134,373
Cool Down, Turbo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429,430
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) . . . . . . . . . . 400
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398,401
Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Points to Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Crankcase Emission Control System . . . . . . . . . . 390
Cruise Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Cup Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70,105
Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Deck Lid (Convertible) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Deck Lid, Emergency Release Latch (Convertible) . . 41
Deck Lid, Power Release (Convertible) . . . . . . . . . 39
Defroster, Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116,279
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Dipsticks
Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
10
474 INDEX
Door Opener, Garage .
Downshifting . . . . . .
Drive Belts . . . . . . . .
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt
Driving
On Slippery Surfaces
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
197
304
388
167
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Electric Rear Window Defrost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . 194
Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234,235,240
Emergency Deck Lid Release Latch (Convertible) . . 41
Emergency, In Case of
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Emergency Seat Back Release (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . 40
Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . 381,434
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115,378,379
Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384,429,430
Oil Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378,379,387
Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Timing Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
INDEX 475
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70,105
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . 38,39,115,339,397
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Fabric Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413,414
Filler Location Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226,340
Filters
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
Engine Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387,430
Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Flat Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Fluid Level Checks
Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . 430
Fog Light Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188,233
Folding Front Passenger Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171,173
Folding Rear Seat (Convertible) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Folding Rear Seat (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337,430
Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
10
476 INDEX
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226,340
Filler Door (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Materials Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Fuel System Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Fueling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink威) . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . 340,342,381
Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337,429
Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Gauges
Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Gearshift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18,163,336
General Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Hands-Free Phone (UConnect™) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
INDEX 477
Headlights
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189,234
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch . . . . . . . . 189
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Hitches
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
HomeLink威 (Garage Door Opener) Transmitter . . . 197
Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403,404
Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring System (Spark Plug Wires)
Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . .
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . 13
. . . . . . . . . . . 13
. . . . . . . . . . 388
. . . . . . . . . . . 13
. . . . . . . . . 15,37
Infant Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73,107
Information Center, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223,226
Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Instrument Panel Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413,415
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Integrated Power Module (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360,363
Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Key, Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
10
478 INDEX
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) . . . . . . .
Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keyless Entry System (Convertible)
Keyless Entry System (Sedan) . . . .
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
15
15
30
24
13
Lane Change and Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45,82
Latches
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Liftgate (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424,425
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117,184
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70,104,116,234
Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Back-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Center Mounted Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Engine Temperature Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188,233,426
Front Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . . 229
Map Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184,185
Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Rear Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
INDEX 479
Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186,189,230,426
Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . . . 226
Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Locks
Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Steering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Low Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Luggage Rack (Roof Rack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Maintenance Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Maintenance, General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Maintenance Schedule
Schedule “A”-Non Turbo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
Schedule “A”-Turbo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
Schedule “B” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Schedule “B”-All Engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Maintenance Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . 229,381
Manual Override, Convertible Top . . . . . . . . . 134,373
Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
Manual Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292,301,410
Downshifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Frequency of Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Lubricant Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184,185
Master Cylinder (Brakes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
10
480 INDEX
Mini-Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383,464
MTBE/ETBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Occupant Classification System (OCS) . . . . . . . . . . 60
Occupant Restraints (Convertible) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Occupant Restraints (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229,230
Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384,429
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386,429
Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Oil Filter, Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Oil Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380,381
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink威) . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Outside Air Intake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Overdrive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
INDEX 481
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . 4,465
Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Panel Rear Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26,32
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Passenger Seat Back Tilt (Easy Entry System) . . . . 168
Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Personal Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80,114
Phone, Cellular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Phone, Hands-Free (UConnect™) . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . . . 317
Power
Deck Lid Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . . . 206
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310,394
Steering, Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394,431
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . 54,89
Preparation for Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Pretensioners
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53,88
Programmable Electronic Features . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Programming Transmitters (Remote Keyless
Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27,33
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) . . . . . . . . . . 400
Radio Broadcast Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251,259,277
Radio, Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
10
482 INDEX
Radio (Sound Systems) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251,259
Rear Liftgate (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Rear Seat, Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171,173,175,177
Rear Seat Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Rear Shelf Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Rear Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70,105
Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Reminder, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54,89
Remote Keyless Entry (Convertible) . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Remote Keyless Entry (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72,78,107,112
Restraints, Infant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73,107
Roof Rack (Luggage Rack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54,89
Seat Belts
Adjustable Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
INDEX 483
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . . . 52
And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54,89
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72,107
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45,82
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53,88
Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45,82
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52,88
Seat Belts (Convertible) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Seat Belts (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Easy Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Emergency Seat Back Release (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . 40
Folding Front Passenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171,173,175,177
Rear Folding (Convertible) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Rear Folding (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Seatback Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167,168
Tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167,168
Tumbling Rear (Convertible) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Tumbling Rear (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15,37
Sentry Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Service and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250,253,261
Settings, Personal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
10
484 INDEX
Severe Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Shift Speeds, Manual Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45,82
Side Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64,100
Side Window Demisters (Defrosters) . . . . . . . . . . 285
Slippery Surfaces, Driving On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325,361
Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . . . . 194,229
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Speedometer and Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291,292
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Starting and Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291,292
Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Steering
Linkage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310,394
Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Wheel Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209,423
Stuck, Freeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Sun Visor Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag . . . . . . 55,90
Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . . . . . . 226,359
Tether Anchor, Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77,111
Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Theft System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Tire and Loading Information Placard . . . . . . . . . 317
INDEX 485
Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117,321,467
Aging (Life of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Flat Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317,318
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . 227,332
Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313,321
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Top Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Traction Control Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
10
486 INDEX
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Trailer and Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Trailer Towing Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13,291,294,408
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14,292,301
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Overdrive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Transmission
Range Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Transmitter Battery Service (Remote Keyless
Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29,35
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink威) . . 197
Transmitter Programming (Remote Keyless
Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27,33
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80,114
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Trip Odometer Reset Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Trunk Lid, Deck Lid (Convertible) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Tumbling Rear Seat (Convertible) . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Tumbling Rear Seat (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Turbo Cool Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189,230
UConnect™ (Hands-Free Phone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Understanding Your Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . 222
Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
INDEX 487
Universal Transmitter . . . . . . .
Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . .
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt
Upholstery Care . . . . . . . . . .
.............
.............
............
.............
. 197
. 337
52,88
. 413
Vacuum/Vapor Harnesses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Variance, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318,342
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Vehicle Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . 36
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster
Description) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Warnings and Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
Washer, Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Washer, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Wheel Alignment and Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Wheel and Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44,205
Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190,191
Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190,396
Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Wiper, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
YES Essentials威 Fabric Cleaning Procedure . . . . . . 414
10
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interference between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
2nd Edition
First
Edition
Printed in U.S.A.
2008 PT Cruiser Sedan/Convertible
81-026-0844
2008
OWNER’ S MANUAL
PT Cruiser
Sedan/Convertible
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement